JP2019198423A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a slot machine with an improved holding state that do not reduce the remaining amount of the amount of advantage.SOLUTION: A main control unit can control a section to an advantageous section that can be controlled to an AT state, performs a subtraction process to reduce the remaining number of navigation games by winning a navigation target combination in the AT state, terminates the AT state when the number of navigation games becomes 0, can control a state to a holding state that does not decrease the number of navigation games even when the navigation target combination in the AT state is won, terminates the AT state when any one of a first condition that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and a second condition that is satisfied when the net increase number of tokens in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number is satisfied even when the number of navigation games remains, and counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section and the net increase number of tokens in the advantageous section even in the holding state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  This type of slot machine is controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player until the remaining number of games reaches zero, and “HOLD” is displayed in the vicinity of the number of remaining games when a specific state is reached during the advantageous state. A game in which the update of the number of games is stopped has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-7423 A

  As with the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement with respect to a configuration that can stop the update of the remaining amount in the advantageous state.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that is improved with respect to a hold state that does not reduce an advantageous remaining amount.

The slot machine according to claim 1,
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable,
In the slot machine (slot machine 1) in which the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning can be generated according to the display result.
Advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to an advantageous state (AT state) advantageous to the player;
A remaining amount reducing means (subtraction processing of the number of navigation games) capable of reducing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) by occurrence of a predetermined event in the advantageous state (winning of the navigation target role);
First advantageous state ending means for ending the advantageous state when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount runs out;
Hold state control means (hold control) for controlling to a hold state (hold state) that does not decrease the remaining amount of the advantageous amount even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state;
Advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the advantageous section that can be controlled to the advantageous state (AT state);
Game number counting means (advantageous area game number counter) for counting the number of games controlled in the advantageous area (number of advantageous area games);
Increasing value counting means (net increasing number counter) for counting an increased value (medal net increasing number) in the advantageous section;
Even if the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (the number of navigation games) remains, it is established when the number of games (the number of advantageous section games) counted by the game number counting means reaches the specified number of games (the upper limit number of games). Either the first condition (end condition 1) or the second condition (end condition 2) that is satisfied when the value counted by the increased value counting means (medal net increase number) exceeds a specified value (specified number). Second advantageous state ending means for ending the advantageous state (AT state) when one of them is established;
With
The hold state includes a first hold state (first hold state) and a second hold state (second hold state),
The game number counting means counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section even in the hold state (hold state),
The increased value counting means counts the increased value in the advantageous section even in the hold state (hold state).
According to this feature, in the advantageous state where the remaining amount of the advantageous amount decreases when the predetermined event occurs and ends when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount disappears, even if the predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state, the advantageous amount In some cases, the hold state is controlled so that the remaining amount does not decrease, and a plurality of types of hold states including the first hold state and the second hold state are controlled. Can be increased. In addition, when the specified number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous state ends, and even when the prescribed number of games is not reached, the advantageous state also ends when the value increased in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively increased, and even when controlled to the hold state, the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval and the value increased in the advantageous interval are counted. Even if controlled to the hold state, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively increased.

The slot machine of means 1 is
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (designs) each identifiable,
In the slot machine (slot machine 1) in which the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning can be generated according to the display result.
Advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to an advantageous state (AT state) advantageous to the player;
A remaining amount reducing means (subtraction processing of the number of navigation games) capable of reducing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) by occurrence of a predetermined event in the advantageous state (winning of the navigation target role);
Advantageous state ending means (outgoing ball state related processing) for ending the advantageous state when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is lost (the remaining number of navigation games is zero),
Hold state control means (hold control) for controlling to a hold state (hold state) that does not decrease the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (number of navigation games) even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state;
With
The hold state includes a first hold state (first hold state) and a second hold state (second hold state).
According to this feature, in the advantageous state where the remaining amount of the advantageous amount decreases when the predetermined event occurs and ends when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount disappears, even if the predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state, the advantageous amount In some cases, the hold state is controlled so that the remaining amount does not decrease, and a plurality of types of hold states including the first hold state and the second hold state are controlled. Can be increased.

Note that the means 1 reduces the remaining amount of the advantageous amount when a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state and terminates the advantageous state when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount disappears, for example, by subtracting a numerical value. , The advantage state may end when it becomes 0, or the advantage state may end when the numerical value becomes a predetermined value by adding a numerical value so that the remaining number up to the specified number decreases.
The hold state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not decreased even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state in the means 1 may be a configuration in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is not updated in the holding state, or the advantageous amount The remaining amount of the beneficial amount may be increased by an amount corresponding to the hold state so that the advantageous amount of the remaining amount does not decrease.

The slot machine according to means 2 is the slot machine according to means 1,
Advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the advantageous section that can be controlled to the advantageous state;
First value updating means for updating the first value (the number of advantageous section games) in the advantageous section;
Second value updating means for updating a second value (a net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section) in the advantageous section;
A first end condition (end condition 1) that is established when the first value reaches a first specified value (the number of advantageous section games reaches 1500 games) in the advantageous section, or the second value is the first value. (2) an advantageous section ending means for ending the advantageous section when either one of the second end conditions (end condition 2) that is established by reaching the specified value (the net increase in number exceeds 2388 sheets) is satisfied; ,
When the first value reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games) before reaching the first specified value, the second predetermined value (2088 sheets) before the second value reaches the second specified value ), A prior notification execution means (sub control unit 91) capable of executing a common prior notification (advantageous section end notification) for notifying that the completion of the end condition is near.
With
The common prior notification includes both information related to the first end condition (the number of remaining games up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games) and information related to the second end condition (the remaining number up to the specified number of net increase numbers). It is a feature that it is a notification including.
According to this feature, the first end condition established when the first value updated in the advantageous section reaches the first specified value, or the second value updated in the advantageous section reaches the second specified value. Even if one of the second end conditions established in (1) is not satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent excessive advantage by being controlled to the advantageous section. In addition, when the first value reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the first specified value, or when the second value reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the second specified value, Since the common prior notification for notifying that the end condition is almost established is executed, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being suddenly ended due to the establishment of the first end condition or the second end condition. At this time, since the common prior notification includes both information related to the first end condition and information related to the second end condition, either the first end condition or the second end condition is detected even in the common prior notification. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section will end by

Note that the first end condition established when the first value reaches the first specified value in the means 2 may be satisfied when the first value is equal to or greater than the first specified value. May be established when the value exceeds the value immediately before reaching the first specified value. Similarly, the second end condition established when the second value reaches the second specified value may be satisfied when the second value is equal to or greater than the second specified value, or the second value is the second value. It may be established when the value just before reaching the specified value is exceeded.
Further, in the means 2, the prior notification execution means may execute a common prior notification when the first value becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined value, and the first value reaches the first predetermined value. A common prior notification may be executed when the previous value is exceeded. Similarly, the prior notification execution means may execute a common prior notification when the second value becomes equal to or greater than a second predetermined value, or a value immediately before the second value reaches the second predetermined value. A common prior notification may be executed when the number exceeds.

The slot machine of means 3 is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
The first hold state is a state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (the number of navigation games) does not decrease and the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not increase,
The second hold state is characterized in that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (the number of navigation games) does not decrease and the remaining amount of the advantageous amount can be increased.
According to this feature, not only does the remaining amount of the advantageous amount not decrease in the second hold state, but it can increase, so that the interest by having the first hold state and the second hold state can be further enhanced.

The slot machine according to means 4 is the slot machine according to means 3,
The second hold state is a state in which the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (the number of navigation games) can be increased when the predetermined event (winning of the navigation target role) occurs.
According to this feature, the remaining amount of the advantageous amount can be increased by the occurrence of a predetermined event that causes the remaining amount of the advantageous amount to decrease unless it is controlled to the hold state. Can further enhance interest.

The slot machine of means 5 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
A hold state suggesting means (hold effect) for indicating that the hold state is controlled;
Remaining amount display means (remaining navigation game number image) for displaying the remaining amount of advantageous amount (number of navigation games) in the advantageous state (AT state);
With
The remaining amount display means also reduces the display of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (remaining navigation game number image) when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is decreased by the remaining amount reducing means (subtraction processing of the number of navigation games). Updated as
The hold state suggestion means (hold effect)
First hold state suggesting means (first hold effect) for indicating that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state (first hold state);
Second hold state suggesting means (second hold effect) for indicating that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state (second hold state);
Including
The remaining amount display is performed both when the first hold state suggesting means suggests that the hold state is controlled and when the second hold state suggesting means suggests that the hold state is controlled. The visibility of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the means (remaining navigation game number image) is reduced.
According to this feature, in the hold state, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not decrease by reducing the visibility of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display unit. In addition, even when suggesting that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state, or when suggesting that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state, the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display means Since the visibility of the remaining amount is lowered, it is possible to easily notify that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not decrease in any of the hold states.

  Note that reducing the visibility of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display device in the means 5 means that another display is superimposed on the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display device. A configuration in which the visibility is reduced, a color is thinned, a configuration in which the visibility is reduced by lowering the transparency, and the display of the remaining amount of the advantageous amount displayed by the remaining amount display means. This corresponds to the configuration to be deleted.

The slot machine of means 6 is the slot machine according to means 5,
The first hold state suggesting means (first hold effect) is displayed by the remaining amount display means (remaining navigation game number image) over a period controlled to the first hold state (first hold state). Reducing the visibility of the remaining amount (number of navigation games)
The second hold state suggesting means (second hold effect) is displayed by the remaining amount display means (remaining navigation game number image) over a period controlled to the second hold state (second hold state). It is characterized by reducing the visibility of the remaining amount (number of navigation games).
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount does not decrease over the period when the hold state is controlled.

The slot machine of means 7 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
Both the end of the first hold state (first hold state) and the end of the second hold state (second hold state) shift to a common state (non-hold state).
According to this feature, both the controlled state in the first hold state and the controlled state in the second hold state shift to the common state after the end, so that it is understood that the hold state has ended. It can be easily recognized.

  Note that the common state in the means 7 may be a state in which advantageous control contents for the player in the advantageous state are common, or may be a state in which the production mode is common.

The slot machine according to means 8 is the slot machine according to means 7,
Display means (liquid crystal display 51),
A common background (AT effect (normal) background image A) is displayed on the display means both after the end of the first hold state (first hold state) and after the end of the second hold state (second hold state). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a common background is displayed both in the case of control in the first hold state and in the case of control in the second hold state, so that the end of the hold state can be recognized more clearly. Can be made.

The slot machine of means 9 is the slot machine according to any of means 1 to 8,
Advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the advantageous section that can be controlled to the advantageous state (AT state);
Game number counting means (advantageous area game number counter) for counting the number of games controlled in the advantageous area (number of advantageous area games);
Increasing value counting means (net increasing number counter) for counting an increased value (medal net increasing number) in the advantageous section;
Even if the remaining amount of the advantageous amount (the number of navigation games) remains, it is established when the number of games (the number of advantageous section games) counted by the game number counting means reaches the specified number of games (the upper limit number of games). Either the first condition (end condition 1) or the second condition (end condition 2) that is satisfied when the value counted by the increased value counting means (medal net increase number) exceeds a specified value (specified number). Second advantageous state ending means (main control unit 41) for ending the advantageous state when one of them is established;
With
The game number counting means counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section even in the hold state (hold state),
The increased value counting means counts the increased value in the advantageous section even in the hold state (hold state).
According to this feature, reaching the specified number of games from the start of the advantageous section ends the advantageous state, and even if the specified number of games is not reached, even if the value increased in the advantageous section exceeds the predetermined value Since the advantageous state is ended, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively increased, and even when controlled to the hold state, the count of the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval and the counted value increased in the advantageous interval are For this reason, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively increased even if the hold state is controlled.

The slot machine of means 10 is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
Benefit suggestion means for suggesting the possibility that a privilege (addition of the number of navigation games) advantageous to the player is given in the first hold state (first hold state) or the second hold state (second hold state) ( It is characterized by having an additional state transfer possibility suggestion effect).
According to this feature, it can be expected that a privilege is given by being controlled to the first hold state or the second hold state.

The slot machine of the means 11 is the slot machine according to any one of the means 1 to 10,
Before the display result is derived, it has a pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining the display result that is permitted to be derived,
Decide whether or not to control to the second hold state (second hold state) when the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) becomes a specific result (specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2) Second hold state determination means (addition state transition lottery),
With
In the first hold state (first hold state), the privilege (addition of the number of navigation games) is not granted, and the privilege may be given in the second hold state (second hold state),
In the hold state control means (hold control), the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) becomes a specific result (specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2), and the second hold state (second hold state) When it is determined to control to the second hold state, the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes a specific result, and when it is not determined to control to the second hold state, Control to the first hold state (first hold state);
The privilege suggesting means (additional state transition possibility suggesting effect) suggests the possibility that the privilege is given in the first hold state (first hold state).
According to this feature, even if the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes the specific result and the possibility of being controlled to the second hold state where a privilege can be granted is suggested, Since the possibility that a privilege is given by the privilege suggesting means during that time is suggested, even in such a case, the expectation that a privilege will be given can be enhanced.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state. It is a figure for demonstrating an internal lottery object combination. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a game auxiliary | assistant display. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution aspect of a navigation alerting | reporting and a navigation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a game area. It is a figure for demonstrating advantageous area alerting | reporting and internal suggestion. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the game auxiliary | assistant display in an error state and a setting confirmation state. It is a figure for demonstrating the order of restart of advantageous area alerting | reporting and navigation alerting | reporting when electric power supply is restarted after the electric power supply to a slot machine was stopped during execution of advantageous area alerting | reporting and navigation alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game start waiting process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the ball control process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the AT state management process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a change of a pure increase number counter value. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal payout process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the re-game action which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process which a main control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of display modes, such as a game auxiliary | assistant display, at the time of the start of advantageous area alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of display modes, such as a game auxiliary indicator, at the time of completion | finish of advantageous area alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating transition of display modes, such as a game auxiliary indicator, at the time of completion | finish of advantageous area alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the control state regarding AT. It is a figure for demonstrating AT production (normal) which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the ending suggestion effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the advance alerting | reporting regarding AT production (ending) and the advantageous area end which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a game and production. It is a figure for demonstrating the start timing and completion | finish timing of prior alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the start timing and completion | finish timing of prior alerting | reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the weak hold effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the strong hold effect which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold production which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold production | presentation which a sub-control part performs, an addition state production, and an addition production | presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution timing of the 1st hold production which a sub-control part performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution timing of the 2nd hold production which a sub-control part performs.

  A mode for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

  Embodiments of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a front door 1b pivotally supported on a side end of the housing 1a. Yes. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are arranged in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in a see-through window 3 provided in the approximate center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each is displayed in three stages, upper, middle and lower, so that it can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of kinds of symbols (“red 7”, “blue 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “watermelon”, “cherry a” ”,“ Cherry b ”,“ Bell ”,“ Replay ”,“ Plum ”) are arranged in a predetermined order.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may be used. . In the present embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R constitute a variable display unit that variably displays a symbol. However, the variable display unit may be other than the reel, for example, a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface. The structure which can carry out the variable display of the symbol by moving the belt arrange | positioned may be sufficient. In this embodiment, the variable display unit is configured by a physical reel. However, the variable display unit may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) ), The MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum number of bets out of the prescribed number (3 in this embodiment) determined according to the gaming state within the range, as credits Settlement switch 10 operated when the medal used for setting the medal and the bet number stored (returning the medal used for setting the credit and the bet number) is operated when starting the game Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, which are operated when stopping the rotation of the start switch 7 and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively, can be operated by the player. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning and the contents when an error occurs are shown. Game auxiliary display 12 for displaying error code, operation information (navigation information) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, advantageous section display indicating that it is controlled to the advantageous section, and the number of bets 1 BETLED 14 that informs that 1 is set by lighting, 2 BETLED 15 that informs that 2 bets are set, 2 BETLED 16 that informs that 3 bets are set, 3 There is a game start operation by operating the throw-in request LED 17 and the start switch 7 to notify the possible state by lighting. A start valid LED 18 for informing that it is lit, and a waiting LED 19 for informing that it is in a wait state (a state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game). A game display unit 13 provided with a replaying LED 20 for notifying that a replay game is in progress by lighting is provided. In addition, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying an image or the like is provided on the front surface of the slot machine 1.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R are left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) that notify by lighting that the operation of stopping the reel by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. Is provided.

  Inside the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by a predetermined key operation, while changing the set value or checking the set value, A set value display 24 for displaying a set value, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, either a hopper tank side or a medal payout exit 9 side described later provided inside the slot machine 1. There are provided a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching and a medal selector (not shown) having an insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, the reel unit 34 for driving the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R described above according to the control signal from the main control unit 41, and the medal according to the control signal from the main control unit 41. Is provided from the medal payout opening 9.

  The slot machine 1 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a reset switch for canceling an error state in a normal state. The setting change state will be described later. There is provided a reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the effect control board 90 responds to the game state. Production control is performed.

  The game control board 40 includes the above-described MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, reel unit 34 reel sensor (not shown), and hopper. A payout sensor and a full sensor (not shown) of the unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset / setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals from these connected switches and the like are input.

  The game control board 40 includes the credit indicator 11, the game auxiliary indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, the left The middle, right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, the reel unit 34, and the hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electric components are mounted on the game control board 40. It is driven based on the control of the main control unit 41.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d, and is mounted with a main control unit 41 for controlling the game.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to an effect device such as the above-described liquid crystal display 51, a speaker capable of outputting sound, and a reel LED (not shown) capable of irradiating a predetermined position of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the back side. The output state of these effect devices can be controlled by the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90. In response to the command transmitted from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 performs various controls for producing effects.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in a lottery that affects the player's advantage such as an internal lottery. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate being lower as the value is decreased in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Transition to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated one by one (when the set value 6 is further operated, the set value 1 is set. Return). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned OFF, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  The setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the store clerk possessing a predetermined key among the store clerk of the installed amusement store can operate. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires a further key operation, only a store clerk possessing a key for operating the setting key switch 37 can be operated among the store clerk of the game store. The reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires a key operation using a predetermined key, so that only a store clerk who has the predetermined key can operate. Further, the reset / setting switch 38 functions as a reset switch for canceling the error state in the normal state.

  In the case of playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets using credits. When a stipulated number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, a predetermined pay line LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are arranged in the middle in the horizontal direction. Is set across the symbols), and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit. In this embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

  When the start switch 7 is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, stop control is performed on the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the reels is performed. The reel is stopped and the symbol of the reel is derived and displayed as a display result on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  In the stop control, the control for stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation within the maximum stop delay time (in this embodiment, 190 ms (milliseconds)) from when each stop switch is operated is performed. Is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and 80 (rotations) x 21 (the number of symbols per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 frames is changed, so a predetermined maximum Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, a maximum of four symbols can be drawn. In other words, in the stop control, the symbol displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbol that is four frames ahead from that symbol, a total of five symbols (retraction range), one symbol. Can be selected and led to the reels 2L, 2R, 2R.

  Thereby, in the stop control, when the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is operated to stop the rotation, the winning combination won by the internal lottery described later is selected. If the symbol to be configured is within the drawing range from the symbol when the stop switch is operated to 4 frames ahead, the symbol is drawn onto the winning line LN and the reel for which the stop switch is operated is rotated. On the other hand, if the symbol constituting the winning combination won in the internal lottery is not within the drawing range, the symbol constituting the winning combination not won in the internal lottery is the winning line LN. In order not to stop upward, a symbol that does not constitute any winning combination is drawn on the winning line LN, and control is performed to stop the rotation of the reel on which the stop switch is operated. It is possible.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and the combination of symbols of the winning combination predetermined on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. In some cases, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when the combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state according to the combination of symbols is shifted. .

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. Further, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of winning combinations (hereinafter referred to as winning combinations) are determined according to the gaming state, and it is not necessary to set a small combination with payout of medals and the number of bets. In addition, there are a re-playing role capable of starting the next game and a special role accompanied by a transition to a gaming state (special state) advantageous to the player. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and set a winning flag for the winning combination. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to allow winnings in each of the above-mentioned combinations before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, a predetermined number When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the bet number set, the random number is used for determination.

  Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It has become.

  Further, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, stop operation order, operation timing) determined in advance, it is a small advantage that is advantageous over the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. A combination and a re-playing combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigation target combination) can be won. For example, the role subject to navigation may be a role that is more advantageous than a stop mode that stops when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode. In addition, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode that is determined in advance, a role that has a higher rate of stoppage that is more advantageous than when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode is included. Further, the advantageous stop mode includes not only a stop mode with medal grant, but also a stop mode with a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stop mode with which a transition to an unfavorable gaming state is avoided, and the like.

  The main control unit 41 executes navigation notification that notifies the navigation information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT) that is a possible notification period. The main control unit 41 starts the AT control and controls the AT by giving the player the right to be controlled by the AT. When the control is performed by the AT, the navigation target is won by winning the navigation target role, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player (for example, pressing order, Operation timing etc.) is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command capable of specifying an operation mode advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, whereby the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. The navigation effect to notify using 51 etc. is performed. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation effect, it is possible to reliably win the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a game auxiliary indicator 12 capable of displaying the number of medals paid out, an error code, and navigation information, and uses the game auxiliary indicator 12 in the control of navigation notification. The navigation information is notified, but a dedicated display capable of displaying only the navigation information may be provided, and the navigation information may be notified using the dedicated display in the navigation notification control.

[About gaming state]
As shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming state as non-internal, internal, or special state (BB general, RB). The gaming state is a state in which the type of re-game player to be a lottery subject to internal lottery and the probability that the re-game player will be won by internal lottery are common. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a re-gamer is different for each game state in non-internal, internal, BB general in special state, and RB in special state, but in the same game state, The probability of winning is uniform. In addition, the types of re-game players who are subject to lottery by internal lottery in the inside are the same as those in non-inside, but the types of re-game players who are subject to lottery by internal lottery in BB in general and RB are as follows: Unlike the non-inside, the type of re-gamer to be a lottery subject to the internal lottery in the BB in general is different from RB.

  In the non-internal state, the winning of the special role (BB) is not carried over. When the slot machine 1 is activated in a state where the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data relating to the gaming state is stored is first controlled to be non-internal. . Moreover, it is controlled in the non-internal state when the special state is terminated. Then, during the non-internal state, the special combination (BB) is won by the internal lottery in the non-internal internal game, and the special combination is lost and transferred to the inside. In addition, in the game in which the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery, the special combination (BB) wins and the game is ended by shifting to the special state.

  It should be noted that the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data relating to the gaming state is stored is not initialized when the setting changing state is transferred to, and after the setting changing state is finished, The game state before the start is taken over. In other words, if it was controlled in the non-internal state before the start of the setting change state, it will continue to be controlled in the non-internal state after the end of the setting change state, and if it was controlled in the internal state before the start of the setting change state In addition, even after the end of the setting change state, the internal control is continued.

  During non-inside, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in a game within a predetermined period, the payout rate of medals per game during the period can be increased. On the other hand, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous for the player, the medal payout rate per game during the period does not exceed 100%. Yes. As will be described later, in the non-inside, an operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, so that the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%.

  Inside, the special role (BB) is being carried over. It starts when a special combination (BB) wins in the internal lottery in the non-inside.

  Inside the game within a predetermined period, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the medal payout rate per game during the period is 100%. On the other hand, since the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. In the period in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%, while in the period in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, the medal per game is The payout rate does not exceed 100%. In the inside, the probability that a small role is won in the internal lottery is the same as the probability in the non-inside, while a predetermined replaying role (in this embodiment, a replaying role) is won in the internal lottery. The probability is set higher than that in the non-inside, and the inside is in an advantageous state as compared to the non-inside.

  The special state is a gaming state controlled in accordance with the winning of the special role (BB), and is started when the special role (BB) wins in a non-inside state, and a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, in the special state) The total payout number of medals exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 50)). After the end of the special state, it is transferred to non-internal.

  The special state includes BB general and RB as the gaming state, and in the special state, the game state is controlled to one of the gaming states until the above-described predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

  In general, the probability of winning a small role in the internal lottery is the same as that in the non-inside and in the inside, but the probability of winning the special role (RB) is high. It starts when the special combination (BB) wins in the inside and shifts to the special state, or when the RB is terminated in a state where the special condition termination condition is not satisfied. The BB general is terminated when the special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the process proceeds to RB.

  RB is a state in which the probability that a small role is won in the internal lottery is higher than that in the inside, inside, and BB in general. The special combination (RB) is won in the internal lottery in the general BB, and the symbol combination of the special combination (RB) is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The RB is at least one of winning a predetermined number of times (8 times in the present embodiment) during the RB and playing a predetermined number of games (12 games in the present embodiment) during the RB. Is established, and the process proceeds to BB general.

  In BB in general, the probability that a special combination (RB) wins in the internal lottery is set higher than the probability of winning in a non-inside and inside. In addition, the probability that the re-gamer will win in the internal lottery is set to 0, and the probability that the re-gamer will win in the non-inside will be assigned to the probability that the special role (RB) will win in the general BB. ing. On the other hand, the probability that the small role is won in the internal lottery in the general BB is set to the same probability as that in the non-inside and inside.

  In addition, in the BB in general, a small role is won in the internal lottery with the same probability as in the non-inside and inside, but as will be described later, an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified without being controlled to the advantageous section. Not to be. A special combination (RB) that can be won in BB in general is a combination in which medals are not paid out in accordance with winning. Accordingly, the payout rate of medals in general BB does not exceed 100%.

  RB is a state in which the probability that a small role is won in the internal lottery is higher than the probability of winning in a non-inside and inside. In the RB, in the internal lottery, the first small role (book) in which a smaller number (for example, one) of medals than the number of medals (for example, three) used for setting the number of bets for one game is paid out in accordance with winning a prize. In the embodiment, the RB medium / small combination 2) is a second small combination (in this embodiment) in which more medals (for example, 8) than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets for one game are paid out upon winning. In this case, the RB medium / small role 1) is won with a higher probability (for example, about 3/4) than the probability of winning (for example, about 1/4), and the number of medals paid out per game in the RB The expected value (for example, 2.75) is smaller than the number of medals (for example, 3) used for setting the number of bets for one game. Further, as will be described later, it is not controlled in the advantageous section, and the operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified. As a result, during RB, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100%. That is, in BB general and RB, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100%, and the medal payout rate in the special state does not exceed 100%. Moreover, in BB general and RB, it is not controlled to an advantageous area.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special role (BB) is elected with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1 / 3.4) determined in advance in the non-inside, and moves into the inside. If the special flag (BB) winning flag is carried over inside, if the AT is not controlled by the AT, which will be described later, the medal payout rate per game does not exceed 100%. When controlled, the medal payout rate per game exceeds 100%.

  In addition, in the reel stop control, when a special combination and a small combination are won at the same time, the control is performed so that the small combination is given priority, and all of the internal lottery targets are selected. The drawing range for the special role (BB) is overlapped with the drawing size range for the small role in any of the small roles, and the winning symbol's winning symbol is the winning line regardless of which of the small roles is won. It will stop at LN. In addition, when the special combination and the re-playing combination are won at the same time, the control is performed so that the re-playing combination is always made. That is, the special combination (BB) is not won when a small combination or replay combination is elected inside.

  In addition, since one of the small roles or one of the re-playing roles is always won in the inside, the special role (BB) will not win a prize once transferred to the inside. After the transition, the inside is maintained.

  In the slot machine 1, since most of the games are controlled inside, it is assumed that the inside is controlled, and medals are paid out according to the set value (1 to 6 in this embodiment). Whether or not to control the AT in the inside so that the rate becomes a value determined according to each setting value, specifically, by setting the winning probability of the AT lottery described later, etc. A corresponding medal payout rate is set.

  Also, since the medal payout rate is set according to the set value on the assumption that the inside is controlled, the medal payout rate is as designed when it is controlled in a gaming state other than the inside. It is preferable that the inside is controlled as much as possible. For this reason, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode recommended for the player and the operation mode for winning the special combination (BB) are different so that the player can easily move into the inside. That is, as long as the player performs a stop operation in the recommended operation mode in the non-inside, the special combination (BB) is not won.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 wins the special combination (BB) when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived. It can be carried over after the game.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the AT to notify the operation mode (the correct pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R which are advantageous by the navigation notification in the inside where the winning of the special role (BB) is carried over. The medal payout rate is designed to be appropriate in the interior.

  In addition, as will be described later, in non-inside and inside of the gaming state, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed by winning an advantageous section transition lottery subject described later in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. The winning game section may be shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. On the other hand, in the special state in the gaming state, as will be described later, the winning section is not won in the advantageous section shift lottery, and the gaming section is not shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section.

  In addition, the special state is a state in which the winning probability of a small role is increased by an internal lottery for each prescribed number of games, for example, and is shifted to a predetermined case and continued until a predetermined number of games is performed. It may be in a state where the winning probability of the small role is increased in the internal lottery for each specified number of games, or it may be in a state where the random number value acquired in the internal lottery is not changed. This is a state in which a small role is won, and it may be shifted to a predetermined game and ended when one game is played, or the winning probability of a small role is increased by internal lottery for each specified number of games. In other words, it may be a state in which a transition is made on the condition that a predetermined symbol combination is derived to the reel, and the game is terminated by playing one game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the special state (BB) in the non-internal state by winning a special state, and in the BB general included in the special state, the special part (in the internal lottery ( RB) is elected and the special role (RB) wins, and the RB is controlled. However, the special role (RB) can be elected even in the internal lottery. It may be configured that the special role (RB) that is won in the game wins or is controlled by the RB.

[About lottery eligible for internal lottery]
An internal lottery object combination that is a lottery object in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target roles. Each internal lottery target includes one or a plurality of winning combinations. When one internal lottery target is won in the internal lottery, the winning combination included in the internal lottery target is elected at the same time. .

  As shown in FIG. 5, the internal lottery target roles include special role (BB), special role (RB), push order small role 1, push order small role 2, push order small role 3, push order small role 4, Push order small combination 5, Push order small combination 6 (hereinafter, push order small combinations 1 to 6 may be collectively referred to as push order small combinations), specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2, RB medium small combination 1, RB medium / small combination 2 and re-game combination are included.

  The special combination (BB) is a combination that involves the transition to the special state described above by winning. The special role (BB) is subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to be non-inside, while the gaming state is controlled to be inside and special (BB general, RB) Not eligible for internal lottery.

  The special combination (RB) is a combination accompanied by the transition to the above-mentioned RB by winning. Special roles (RB) are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to BB in general, while internal lottery is performed when the gaming state is controlled to non-internal and internal, BB general, and RB. The probability that a special role (RB) will win in the internal lottery is in a state other than the general BB (non-inside, inside, RB) It has become a higher probability than.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the non-inside and inside, the special role (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery, and the gaming state shifts from the non-inside or inside to the RB. However, the special role (RB) is subject to lottery of the internal lottery even when the gaming state is controlled in the non-internal or internal state, (RB) may be elected and the symbol combination of the special role (RB) may be stopped by the reel, so that the gaming state can be shifted from non-internal or internal to RB.

  The push order small combinations 1 to 6 are operated by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a predetermined operation mode (in this embodiment, operation order) assigned to each push order small combination. Among the winning combinations included in the above, an increasing combination in which more medals than the bet amount are paid out wins, while the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, Of the winning combinations included in the push order small combinations, a decreasing combination in which the number of medals equal to or less than the number of bets is paid out may win, but none of the winning combinations may win. Therefore, when winning the push order small combinations 1 to 6, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out may be changed depending on whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode corresponding to the type of the winning combination. it can.

  An operation mode in which the winning combination included in the push order small combination when winning the push order small combination 1 to 6 can be won, that is, an operation mode advantageous to the player is a small push order. In the combination 1, an operation in an operation order in which the left reel 2 </ b> L is stopped first, the middle reel 2 </ b> C is stopped second, and the right reel 2 </ b> R is stopped third (hereinafter referred to as a left middle right stop operation). In the push order small combination 2, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter, left and right). In the push order small combination 3, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. Operation (hereinafter referred to as middle / left / right stop operation) In the push order small combination 4, the operation in the operation order in which the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped third (hereinafter, middle right and left) In the push order small combination 5, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third. In the push order small combination 6, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is 3 The operation in the order of operations to be stopped second (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as right middle left stop operation).

  Push order smalls 1 to 6 are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is not controlled inside or inside, and generally controlled by the BB, and are also selected for internal lottery when controlled in any of these gaming states. And win with the same probability. On the other hand, push order small combinations 1 to 6 are not targeted for internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to RB.

  The specific small role 1 and the specific small role 2 are roles having a low probability of winning in the internal lottery as compared to other internal lottery target roles. In addition, the specified small combination 1 is a combination having a higher probability of winning in the internal lottery than the specific small combination 2. Specified small role 1 and Specified small role 2 are subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is not inside and inside, and is generally controlled by the BB, and when the gaming state is controlled to any of these gaming states, The lottery will be won with the same probability. Further, the specific small combination 1 and the specific small combination 2 are not subject to internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to RB.

  RB Medium / Minimum 1 and RB Medium / Minimum 2 are not subject to internal lottery when the game state is non-internal and internal, and when BB is generally controlled, and only when the game state is controlled by RB Eligible for lottery.

  The RB medium / small combination 1 is a small combination that is paid out in accordance with winning a prize, in which a larger number of medals than the number of medals used for setting the number of bets for one game (in this embodiment), The lottery will be won with a probability of about 1/4. On the other hand, the RB medium / small combination 2 is a small combination that is paid out in accordance with winning a prize, which is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the bet number of one game (in this embodiment, one). The internal lottery is won with a probability of about 3/4. As a result, the expected value of the number of medals paid out per game during RB is 2.75, which is smaller than the number of medals used for setting the bet number of one game (three in this embodiment). The payout rate of the medal is not to exceed 100%.

  Regardless of whether the game state is controlled inside or outside, the re-player will be subject to internal lottery and will be controlled in any non-inside or inside game state. Even when it is done, it will be won with the same probability by internal lottery. Further, when the gaming state is BB general or RB, it is not subject to internal lottery.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled inside, the above-mentioned small combinations (push order small combinations 1-6, specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2) and internal lottery and The probability of winning a re-playing role (re-playing role) is that when all winning orders 1 to 6 are won, the winning role is won, and when all the specified small roles 1 and 2 are selected, When a small role is won without being missed, the net increase in medals (obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the number of bets during the predetermined period from the total number of medals paid out during the predetermined period. It is designed so that the average value per game (total number of medals) is a predetermined value (three in this embodiment).

  In the internal lottery, a special combination (BB), special combination (RB), push order small combination 1-6, RB medium / small combination 1, RB medium / small combination 2, replay combination among the internal lottery eligible combinations While there is a probability that there is no difference according to the set value that is set, that is, the winning is performed with a uniform probability regardless of the set value, the specified small role 1 of the internal lottery target roles and The specified small role 2 is won with a probability that is different depending on the set value.

  The main control unit 41 can perform an advantageous section lottery that determines whether or not to shift a gaming section, which will be described later, to an advantageous section, when a predetermined internal lottery target role is won in the internal lottery. . Hereinafter, an internal lottery target combination that triggers an advantageous section lottery may be referred to as an advantageous section transition lottery target combination. In the advantageous section transition lottery, even if any set value is set, if the advantageous section transition lottery target winning in the internal lottery is the same combination, there is a uniform probability that it will be transferred to the advantageous section. An advantageous section shift lottery is performed as determined.

  Among the internal lottery target combinations, the push order small combinations 1 to 6, the specific small combination 1, the specific small combination 2, and the re-playing combination are advantageous section transition lottery target combinations. These advantageous section transition lottery targets are selected with the same probability in the internal lottery when the gaming state is controlled to any of the non-internal and internal gaming states, and the gaming state is An advantageous section transition lottery is performed in response to a combination in which the winning probability of the internal lottery does not change regardless of whether it is controlled inside or not inside.

  In addition, in the inside, a role that is not subject to internal lottery (in the embodiment, special role (BB), special role (RB), RB medium and small role 1, RB medium and small role 2), and the game state is not inside, inside The advantage section shift lottery is not performed in response to the role that the probability of winning in the internal lottery varies depending on which one is controlled.

  The main control unit 41 performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control to the above-described AT, when a predetermined internal lottery object combination is won in the internal lottery. Hereinafter, an internal lottery target role that triggers an AT lottery may be referred to as an AT lottery target role.

  Among the internal lottery target combinations, the push order small combinations 1 to 6, the specific small combination 1, the specific small combination 2, and the re-playing combination are AT lottery target combinations. When the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, an AT lottery is performed by winning one of these AT lottery targets in the internal lottery. In the AT lottery, even if any setting value is set in the slot machine 1, when the AT lottery target winning in the internal lottery is the same combination, it is determined that the AT is controlled with a uniform probability. A lottery will be held so that

  Moreover, in AT lottery that is performed when the specified small combination 1 or the specified small combination 2 is won in the internal lottery, it is triggered by any one of the push order small combinations 1 to 6 or the re-playing combination The decision to control the AT is made with a higher probability than sometimes. In addition, in the AT lottery performed when the specified small role 1 is won, it is determined that the AT is controlled with a higher probability than when the specified small role 2 is won. It is like that.

  In addition, the probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target wins in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and triggered by the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target In the advantageous section transition lottery to be performed, a lottery may be performed with a probability having a difference according to a set value, so that a transition to the advantageous section is determined with a probability having a difference according to the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the AT lottery target in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery performed when the AT lottery target role is won Then, a configuration may be used in which the fact that the AT is controlled is determined with a probability having a difference according to the set value by performing a lottery with a probability having a difference according to the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the AT lottery target role in the internal lottery is a probability that differs depending on the set value set in the slot machine 1, and the AT lottery performed when the AT lottery target role is won Then, a configuration may be used in which the fact that the AT is controlled is determined with a probability having a difference according to the set value by performing a lottery with a probability having a difference according to the set value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning combination in the internal lottery has a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set value set in the slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as a setting difference winning combination). Regardless of whether it is a role with no difference (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a role with no set difference), and a winning lottery lottery or AT lottery will be triggered by the winning of that role. However, on the occasion that the winning combination in the internal lottery is a role with a setting difference, an advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is performed, while on the other hand, an advantageous section transition lottery or AT lottery is triggered It may be configured so that one of the advantageous section transition lottery and AT lottery is triggered by the winning of the role with the setting difference in the internal lottery, and the other of the advantageous section transition lottery and AT lottery is set by the internal lottery Triggered by winning the role with no difference It may be in the configuration.

[About configuration of game auxiliary display]
The structure of the game auxiliary | assistant indicator 12 with which the main control part 41 is provided is demonstrated based on FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the game auxiliary indicator 12 includes two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on / off each of the first to eighth segments, and can light each segment. It is a display. By controlling the predetermined segment of each indicator 12L, 12R to the lighting mode, predetermined numbers (“0” to “9”), symbols (for example, “-”, “.”, Etc.), alphabetic characters (for example, “E ”Etc.) is displayed in one or two digits, so that the number of medals paid out (not shown), the fact that it is controlled to an advantageous section (see FIG. 6B), and the type of error that has occurred It is possible to display an identifiable error code (for example, refer to FIG. 10A), a navigation number (refer to FIG. 7), etc. as navigation information notified by navigation notification.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the main control unit 41 controls the game section as an advantageous section, and when a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied (for example, after the start of the advantageous section, the navigation notification is first issued). Over the notification period from when the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) is started to the time when the predetermined notification end condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section is ended). Informing that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section by controlling the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the auxiliary game display 12R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the advantageous section notification LED 12a) to be lit. It is possible to perform advantageous section notification.

[About navigation and navigation effects]
A navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the game auxiliary display 12 and a navigation effect performed by the sub control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 performs AT control, and when a navigation target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combination 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, a navigation notification is executed and the player is notified. By displaying the navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are advantageous (in this embodiment, the order of operation, hereinafter referred to as the correct answer pressing order) on the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to notify an operation mode that is advantageous for the player.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the navigation notification includes left middle right navigation, left and right middle navigation, middle left and right navigation, middle right left navigation, right left middle navigation, right middle left navigation. In the middle left / right navigation, the navigation number “1-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the left middle right stop operation. In the left / right middle navigation, a navigation number “2-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the left / right middle stop operation. In the middle / left / right navigation, the navigation number “3-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the middle / left / right stop operation. In the middle right / left navigation, the navigation number “4-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the middle right / left stop operation. In the middle left / right navigation, the navigation number “5-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode advantageous to the player is the middle right stop operation. In the middle right / left navigation, the navigation number “6-” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to notify that the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is the middle right / left stop operation.

  Moreover, after starting the advantageous area notification which alert | reports that the main control part 41 is controlling to the advantageous area by the advantageous area notification LED12a as mentioned above, the said advantageous area notification LED12a is continued to be in a lighting state. In the case where navigation notification is performed during execution of the advantageous section notification, the navigation number to be notified by the navigation notification is displayed while the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be lit. The display 12 is controlled to be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the navigation notification, the operation order (correct answer pressing order) is reported as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R which is advantageous to the player. The configuration suggesting the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R advantageous to the player may be used, or the configuration suggesting the combination of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R advantageous to the player may be used. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is a predetermined operation timing for a predetermined reel, the liquid crystal display 51 corresponds to an image of a symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing to the predetermined reel. It is possible to suggest the said operation mode by displaying on the position to perform.

  When performing the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 transmits, to the sub-control unit 91, a command that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is notified by the navigation notification. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a navigation effect that causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a navigation image suggesting an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R specified based on the command. . In the navigation image, a numerical image “1” to “3” that suggests the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a symbol image that suggests that the stop operation is performed at a timing when a predetermined symbol is displayed on the reel. , Display corresponding to the reels 2L, 2C, 2R.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the navigation effect, for example, when a left middle right stop operation is notified by navigation notification, a navigation image suggesting the left middle right stop operation (in this embodiment, corresponding to the left reel 2L). The liquid crystal display 51 displays a numerical image of “1” at a position to be displayed, “2” at a position corresponding to the middle reel 2C, and a “123” numerical image to display “3” at a position corresponding to the right reel 2R. Display. In addition, when the left / right / middle stop operation is notified by the navigation notification, the middle / left / right stop operation is notified, the middle / left / left stop operation is notified, the right / left / middle stop operation is notified, the right / left / left stop operation is notified. Is notified, the navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and control is performed to suggest the corresponding operation mode.

[About the game section]
As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment can control the game section as a normal section or an advantageous section.

  The normal section is a game section in which navigation notification is not performed. After the advantageous section is ended, the next game is started, and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the advantageous section transition lottery. Is finished. In the normal section, the advantageous section notification described above is not performed, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off.

  Further, in the normal section, when the above-described gaming state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery target (push order small combination 1-6, When the specific small combination 1, the specific small combination 2, and the re-playing combination are elected, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by performing the advantageous section transition lottery.

  The probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery target in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and is based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target. In the advantageous section transition lottery, a lottery for determining whether or not to move to the advantageous section with a difference in accordance with a set value set in the slot machine 1 based on a predetermined advantageous section transition lottery table is performed. Is possible. Moreover, in the advantageous section transition lottery, it can be determined that the transition to the advantageous section is made with a uniform probability based on the lottery result of the internal lottery regardless of the controlled gaming state (non-inside, inside). It has become.

  Also, in the advantageous section transition lottery table, the probability that it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when the game state is BB in a special state, that is, the probability of winning the advantageous section transition lottery is set to 0. In general, even if the winning section transition lottery target is won, it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section in the advantageous section transition lottery, and it is not shifted to the advantageous section. In addition, when the gaming state is a special state, even if the winning section transition lottery target is won, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, so that it is not possible to shift to the advantageous section.

  Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the RB in the special state, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed because, as described above, the advantageous section transition lottery target is not a lottery target and is not won. And there is no transition to the advantageous section. That is, when it is controlled to a special state (BB general and RB), it is prevented from shifting to an advantageous section.

  In addition, in the normal section, regardless of whether the above gaming state is controlled to be non-internal or internal, the AT lottery is not performed even if the above-mentioned AT lottery target role is won in the internal lottery. The AT is not determined to control, and the AT is not controlled. The AT lottery during the normal section may be configured such that the AT control is not determined by setting the probability of winning the AT control to 0.

  In addition, the probability that the advantageous section transition lottery target winning a prize in the internal lottery is a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1, and based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery target Even in the advantageous section transition lottery performed, the lottery may be determined so as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. Further, there is a difference in the probability that an advantageous section transition lottery winning combination will be won in the internal lottery according to a set value set in the slot machine 1, and an advantage is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery winning combination. The section shift lottery may be configured to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a uniform probability regardless of the set value set in the slot machine 1. Further, there is a difference in the probability that an advantageous section transition lottery winning combination will be won in the internal lottery according to a set value set in the slot machine 1, and an advantage is performed based on the winning of the advantageous section transition lottery winning combination. The section shift lottery may also be configured to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section with a probability that there is a difference according to the set value set in the slot machine 1.

  The advantageous section is a gaming section in which navigation notification may be performed, and is a gaming section that is advantageous compared to the normal section because the navigation notification can be executed. The advantageous section is started when the next game is started after it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section, and is terminated when a predetermined advantageous section ending condition is satisfied. . In the advantageous section, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game in which the medal payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) can exceed 100% by first performing the navigation notification after the start of the advantageous section. The advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit to notify that the advantageous section is controlled. Further, in the advantageous section, navigation notification is performed when a predetermined navigation condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the state is controlled to an AT state described later and the navigation target combination is elected by internal lottery). The operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R advantageous to the player is notified.

  Further, in the advantageous section, when the aforementioned gaming state is controlled inside, the AT lottery is performed by winning the AT lottery target role in the internal lottery. By winning the AT lottery, the system shifts to an AT state where the AT is controlled thereafter. When the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, navigation notification is performed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player is notified, The game section is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal section.

  In the advantageous section, when the gaming state is controlled to be non-internal, even if the AT lottery target role is won in the internal lottery, the AT lottery is not performed and the AT is not controlled. It is like that. Further, in the advantageous section, even if the above-described advantageous section transition lottery target is won in the internal lottery, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed.

  The end condition of the advantageous section is the end condition 1 established when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games) reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section Is the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum number (15) of the payout number in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit number 2400) and the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet number is added. Is an end condition that can be satisfied without being based on the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in the number of medals. In the present embodiment, (The controlled gaming state is not inside) is included, and the end condition 3 is satisfied, and at least one of the end conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied. It is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the game section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery is won by the internal lottery, and the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. By winning, the game section is shifted to the advantageous section. However, when the gaming section is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition role is elected in advance, so that the gaming section is moved to the advantageous section. It may be configured to shift to

  In this way, the main control unit 41 can control to an advantageous section both in the non-inside where the winning of the special role (BB) is not carried over and in the inside where the winning of the special role (BB) is carried over. It is. The end condition of the advantageous section in the inside is that at least one of the end condition 1 and the end condition 2 is satisfied, while the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside is that the end condition 3 is satisfied, The end condition of the advantageous section in the inside is different from the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside. As a result, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, the end condition of the advantageous section in the inside and the advantageous section in the non-inside inside Since the end condition is different, suitable control can be performed depending on whether the inside is inside or not inside.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 is a structure which is not controlled to an advantageous area in BB generally. Thereby, in the BB general in which the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, it is not controlled to the advantageous section, so that unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the BB general can be omitted.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 is a structure which does not control to an advantageous area in RB. As a result, in the RB in which the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the advantageous section is not controlled, so that unnecessary control related to the advantageous section in the RB is not required.

[Advantageous section notifications and internal suggestions]
The preparation effect that the sub-control unit 91 performs using the liquid crystal display 51 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 has won the special role (BB) in the internal lottery, but the operation of pressing the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished in the game (the stop switch is released). When all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the special combination (BB) symbol combination is not stopped on the reel, and the selected special combination (BB) is carried over without winning a prize. In this case, the game state is shifted from non-internal to internal at the end of the game, and the internal game is controlled from the start of the next game.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 can transmit a command capable of specifying the gaming state controlled in accordance with the progress of the game to the sub-control unit 91, and controls at the start of each game. A command capable of specifying a game state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In addition, a command that can specify the currently controlled gaming state, gaming section, and AT-related control state at a predetermined timing in each game (when the game is started by operating the start switch 7 in this embodiment). Transmit to the sub-control unit 91. In the next game at a predetermined timing in each game (in this embodiment, when the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended and the game is ended by stopping all reels) A command that can specify the game state to be controlled, the game section, and the control state related to the AT is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In addition, when RAM clear is performed to initialize a storage area including a predetermined area in which data relating to the gaming state described above is stored in the RAM 41c, a command that can specify that the RAM clear is performed is sent to the sub-control unit 91. To send.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can use the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to perform a preparation effect that suggests that the gaming state controlled on the main control unit 41 side is not inside. It is.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9A, the sub control unit 91 determines that the RAM clear is performed on the main control unit 41 side based on a command received from the main control unit 41, and then the gaming state is changed. The storage means (for example, RAM, etc.) of the sub-control unit 91 is not yet transferred to the inside but is specified to be controlled to the inside, or when the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory. After being activated in the initialized state, when the game state is not yet controlled to the inside on the main control unit 41 side, and it is specified that the game state is controlled to the inside, an effect in preparation Control to do.

  In preparation for preparation, a preparation screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a “preparation” character image) and a non-inside medium suggestion image (in this embodiment, a star image) are displayed on a liquid crystal display. 51. When it is specified that the gaming state is non-internal, the in-preparation screen and the non-internal internal suggestion image are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the game is being prepared. If the game state is in the non-internal state and the game state is not in the non-internal state and is specified as a special state, the non-internal internal suggestion image is not displayed. By displaying only the image being prepared, it is suggested that the game is being prepared and that the game state is controlled to a special state.

  When it is specified that the gaming state has been shifted to the inside based on the command received from the main control unit 41 while the preparation effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, that is, in the internal lottery, (BB) has been elected, but at the end of the game where the special role (BB) has been missed, the display of the preparation screen and the non-inside inside suggestion image on the liquid crystal display 51 is ended, and the preparation is being made. And the normal effect is started on the liquid crystal display 51. In the normal performance, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a normal performance screen (in this embodiment, an image showing a character strolling around the city) displayed in a non-AT state in which the AT control described later is not performed. , Produce effects according to the progress of the game. By making the transition from the preparation effect to the normal effect, it is suggested that the main control unit 41 side has shifted to the normal state in which the gaming state is inside, that is, the medal payout rate becomes the payout rate as designed (hereinafter, referred to as the game payout rate). It may be called an internal suggestion).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is not in the interior and has been shifted to the special state based on the command received from the main control unit 41 while the preparation effect is being performed on the liquid crystal display 51, That is, at the end of the game where the special role (BB) is won by the internal lottery and the special role (BB) wins, the display of the non-internal inside suggestion image is ended while the display of the preparation screen is continued. Control the production to continue during preparation. And it is controlled based on the command received from the main control unit 41 that the display of the non-inside inside suggestion image is resumed by specifying that the special state is ended and the state is shifted to the inside. Thereafter, control is performed so that the preparation effect is continued until it is determined that the gaming state has been shifted to the inside.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section, wins the AT lottery in the game in the advantageous section and shifts to the AT state, and further starts a predetermined start condition in the subsequent games. When established, advantageous section notification is started. As described above, in the non-inside, the transition is made to the advantageous section. However, since the end condition 3 is satisfied in the first game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated in the advantageous section in the non-inside. The notification start condition is not satisfied and advantageous section notification is not performed. In addition, in order for the advantageous section notification start condition to be satisfied, at least two games (a game in which the AT lottery is performed and a game in which the navigation target role is won) are required after the transition to the advantageous section, the internal start Sometimes, even if the zone is shifted to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous zone notification is not performed. In other words, when the sub control unit 91 changes the effect mode on the liquid crystal display 51 from the preparation effect to the normal effect, and it is suggested that the game state has been changed to the inside, the advantageous section notification is performed. No, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is maintained in the off state (see FIG. 9A).

  In this way, the sub-control unit 91 starts the normal effect while the preparation effect that is performed when being controlled in the non-inside is ended when the non-inside is transferred to the inside, By controlling to perform the normal production without performing the production in preparation when being controlled in, the non-inside from the inside by the fact that the production in preparation is finished and the normal production is started This is a configuration for executing an internal suggestion indicating that the internal transition has been made. As a result, when a transition from non-internal to internal is performed, the internal control by the sub-control unit 91 is executed, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate in a situation where a game is played on the game store side. Can be identified.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 displays an internal medium suggestion indicating that the game state has been transferred to the inside by ending the preparation effect at the end of the game in which the game state has been transferred from the non-inside to the inside. This can be done using the device 51. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can perform advantageous section notification using the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. The position where the internal suggestion is executed is different from the position where the advantageous section notification is executed, and the timing when the internal suggestion is executed is different from the timing when the advantageous section notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding of the suggestion that the inside has become inside due to the inside suggestion and the suggestion that it has shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 can cause the liquid crystal display 51 to display a screen for preparation and a non-internal inside suggestion image in the preparation effect, and the gaming state controlled on the main control unit 41 side is displayed. When it is not inside, it displays the in-preparation screen and the non-inside inside suggestion image to indicate that the game is being prepared and that the game state is controlled to the inside, and the main control unit When the game state controlled on the 41 side is not in a non-inside state but in a special state, the non-inside inside suggestion image is not displayed, but only the in-preparation image is displayed, and the game is being prepared. And it is suggested that the gaming state is controlled to a special state. Thereby, after it is specified that the RAM clear is performed on the main control unit 41 side, it is specified that the gaming state has not yet been transferred to the inside and is controlled to be inside. When the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory until the inside of the game machine until the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, the game machine is in a non-internal state before the internal state, It can be recognized whether it is a special state before becoming. Further, in such a situation, by displaying the screen during preparation and the non-inside inside suggestion image by the preparation during preparation, even if a special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery, the special combination It is possible to suggest that it is possible to make the inside where the payout rate of medals is appropriate by performing the operation mode in which (BB) is difficult to win. Further, in such a situation, it is possible to suggest that it is not necessary to play the game in the special operation mode until the special state is ended by not displaying the non-inside inside suggestion image by the preparation effect.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state in which the navigation notification is performed while controlling the inside and the advantageous section, and first performs the navigation notification after the transition to the advantageous section. By controlling so that the advantageous section is notified in the game, it is possible to execute the advantageous section notification when the advantageous section is controlled inside, but it is advantageous when the advantageous section is controlled while not inside. It is the structure which does not perform area alerting | reporting. As a result, in the configuration where the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and in the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate, the advantageous section is controlled. In such a case, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the advantageous section notification is not executed when the merit payout rate is controlled in the non-inside, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. In such a situation that the game store side plays a game until it becomes inside, it becomes unnecessary to perform unnecessary advantageous section notification.

  It should be noted that the preparation effect may be any that suggests that at least the main control unit 41 side has not shifted to the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate, and only the preparation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It may be configured to display.

  In addition, internal suggestion can suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in a situation where at least the game store side plays until the internal payout rate is appropriate. In other words, a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51 or an effect of controlling a specific LED to be in a lighting state during a period controlled inside the main control unit 41 side. In addition, the specific sound may be output from the speakers 53 and 54, while the specific effect is not performed in the non-internally controlled period. While performing a specific effect, the structure which does not perform the specific effect may be sufficient in the period controlled inside. In these configurations, the specific effect may be performed during one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-internal to the internal in the situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. is there.

  In addition, internal suggestion can suggest that the gaming state has shifted from non-internal to internal in a situation where at least the game store side plays until the internal payout rate is appropriate. If the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to be non-internal on the main control unit 41 side at the time of activation, the sub-control unit 91 performs a non-internal / internal display effect in the non-internal, and from the non-internal After the transition to the inside, a configuration in which the non-inside display effect is not performed even if the transition to the non-inside is performed again. In such a configuration, after the situation where the game shop side plays a game until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, unnecessary internal suggestion is not executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the inside suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub-control unit 91, but the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform the inside suggestion. For example, when the main control unit 41 includes an LED indicator that suggests that the main control unit 41 is not inside or inside, and the LED display is not inside. It is possible to adopt a configuration that suggests that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling to the off state when the inside is in the inside, or the lighting state when the LED indicator is inside. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling to be turned off when it is not inside. Further, in a configuration in which the main control unit 41 includes an LED indicator that suggests that it is non-internal or internal, the LED indicator is an indicator that performs suggestions other than internal internal suggestion (for example, credit display) The segment may be shared with the segment that displays “.” In the display 11), or may be configured as a dedicated display that only suggests the inside.

  Next, advantageous section notification performed by the main control unit 41 using the advantageous section notification LED 12a, navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12, and AT confirmation notification performed by the sub-control unit 91 using the liquid crystal display 51, The AT effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the main control unit 41 performs AT lottery when the game state is controlled inside and the game zone is controlled as an advantageous zone, and the AT lottery is performed. By winning, it is then shifted to the AT state where the AT is controlled. After the transition to the AT state, the stop switches 8L and 8C are at the start of the game in which the winning combination is first won in the internal lottery, and after the start switch 7 for starting the game is operated. , The advantageous section notification is started during the period before the operation of 8R is activated, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, then the navigation notification is executed and the navigation assistance display 12 is given the navigation number. Control to display.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 wins the AT lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a command that can specify that the AT lottery has been won and the timing for shifting to the AT state. At the start of each game, a command that can specify the result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, when performing the navigation notification, a command capable of specifying the operation mode notified by the navigation notification is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the AT confirmation that the main control unit 41 has confirmed that the AT is controlled, and the AT effect that suggests that it is controlled to the AT state, It is possible to perform a navigation effect suggesting an operation mode notified by the navigation notification using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the fact that the AT lottery is won is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 is specified that the AT lottery is won. AT at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, at the end of the game one game before the AT state is started) during the period from when the AT state is drawn to when the state is shifted to the AT state in response to the winning of the AT lottery Notification. In the AT confirmation notification, an AT confirmation notification screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image of “AT determination!”) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and controlled by the AT on the main control unit 41 side. To the effect that it has been confirmed.

  Then, a predetermined timing during the period from when the AT confirmation notification is performed until the main control unit 41 shifts to the AT state (in this embodiment, at the start of the game in which the AT state is started (the game is At the time of operation of the start switch 7 for starting))), the normal effect is changed to the AT effect. In the AT effect, an AT effect screen (in the present embodiment, an image showing a character flying in outer space) having an effect mode different from the normal effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, so that the main control unit 41 side is displayed. This suggests that it is controlled to the AT state.

  Thereafter, when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, a navigation image corresponding to the operation mode notified by the navigation notification (for example, a navigation indicating a middle left stop operation) Displaying the image (see FIG. 7) on the liquid crystal display 51 suggests an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player.

  In this way, after being controlled inside, the main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section, further shifts to the AT state, and starts the advantageous section notification at the start of the game where the predetermined start condition is satisfied. The advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted to the advantageous section. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform the preparation effect on the liquid crystal display 51 when the game state is controlled to be non-internal on the main control unit 41 side, and performs the preparation effect. At the end of the game in which the game state is shifted from the non-internal state to the internal state, the game state is changed from the non-internal state to the internal state by changing the effect mode on the liquid crystal display 51 from the preparation effect to the normal effect. It is suggested to have moved in.

  That is, while the liquid crystal display 51 suggests that the gaming state has been shifted to the inside, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the gaming auxiliary display 12) suggests that the gaming state has been shifted to the advantageous section. The suggestion that it has been transferred to the inside and the suggestion that it has been transferred to the advantageous section are performed at different points (displays). In addition, the indication that the gaming state has been transferred to the inside is that at the end of the game in which the special role (BB) is won in the internal lottery in the non-inside, the fact that it has been transferred to the advantageous section Is suggested at the beginning of the game where the start condition of the advantageous section notification is satisfied. The suggestion that the inside has been shifted to the inside and the suggestion that the advantageous section has been shifted to the advantageous section are in one game. Are performed at different timings.

[Advantageous section notification in error state and setting confirmation state]
The advantageous section notification in the error state and the setting confirmation state will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the control of the advantageous section notification, the main control unit 41 continuously controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state without turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a during the notification period for controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state. When displaying the medal payout number, error code, navigation number, and the like on the game auxiliary display 12 during the notification period, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (with the corresponding segments of the respective displays 12L and 12R for displaying them) Both the eighth segment of the right side display 12R are controlled to be in the lighting state.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 can control to an error state that disables the progress of the game by detecting the occurrence of an error in the slot machine 1. When the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, when the error section is controlled based on the occurrence of the error, In addition, while the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state, the control is performed so as to display an error code that can identify the type of the error that has occurred using the other segments of the game auxiliary display 12. Then, the error state is canceled by a predetermined operation, so that the error state is terminated and the display of the error code is terminated. Even after the error state is ended, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be lit until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied before the control of the error state.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 is in a normal state where the main control unit 41 side is not controlled to an error state or a setting confirmation state described later, an effect image corresponding to a later-described gaming state or a control state related to the AT, For example, when the control state related to the AT, which will be described later, is a non-AT state, a normal effect screen that is mainly displayed in the non-AT state (in this embodiment, an image showing a character strolling around the city) is displayed. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an effect according to the progress of the game is performed. On the other hand, during the period in which the occurrence of an error is detected on the main control unit 41 side and is controlled to be in an error state, the main control unit 41 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to an advantageous section. An error screen (in this embodiment, a character image and an error code) showing an error code that can identify the type of error that triggered the error state on the side and information related to the error (for example, a canceling method) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and control is performed to suggest that the error state is being controlled.

  As described above, when the main control unit 41 is controlling to the advantageous section and controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, if the main control unit 41 shifts to the error state that disables the progress of the game, Since an error code that can identify the error state is displayed on the auxiliary display 12 and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be kept in a lit state, the error state is set based on the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is controlled and that it is controlled in the advantageous section. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize the state of the gaming machine before shifting to the error state.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 controls to the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in the lighting state, the main control unit 41 displays an error code on the game auxiliary display 12 when it is shifted to the error state. In addition, the sub-control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the advantageous section, and controls the error code or the error. Information (for example, the release method) is controlled to be suggested using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like, so that the liquid crystal display 51 or the like is in a state where the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to prevent the user from misidentifying that the game is controlled to an advantageous section in which a game can be performed based on the contents of the effect.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the main control unit 41 detects an operation of turning on the setting key switch 37 by a predetermined key operation in a state where the game is not being performed. The setting check state is entered to disable the progress of the game, and the setting value display 24 is controlled to display the setting value currently set in the slot machine 1, and then the setting key is operated by a predetermined key operation. By detecting an operation to turn off the switch 37, the setting confirmation state can be ended, the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state. Sometimes, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state even during the setting confirmation state, while the set value indicator 2 Performs control to display the set value (not shown). Then, even after the setting confirmation state is ended, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is continuously controlled to be in the lighting state until a predetermined notification end condition is satisfied before the transition to the setting confirmation state.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the sub-control unit 91 is in a normal effect screen (in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 side is in a normal state that is not controlled to the setting confirmation state or the error state described above. An image showing a character strolling around the city) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to produce an effect according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, in the period controlled by the main control unit 41 to the setting confirmation state, the main control unit 41 side does not suggest that it is controlled to the advantageous section, and the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation state screen (in this embodiment, a character image and a character image indicating the setting confirmation state) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to control the setting confirmation state. Control to suggest.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, so that the progress of the game is disabled and the set value display 24 is currently set. Since the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be kept in a lit state when the setting confirmation state for displaying the set value is displayed, the advantageous section is controlled based on the display content of the game auxiliary display 12. The player can recognize that it is. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize the state of the gaming machine before shifting to the setting confirmation state.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and controls the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state, when the main control section 41 shifts to the setting confirmation state, the set value display 24 (not shown). While displaying the set value and controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be kept in the lighting state, the sub-control unit 91 does not suggest that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the advantageous section, Control is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to indicate that it is in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is misunderstood that the game is controlled to an advantageous zone in which a game can be performed based on the contents of the performance by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like while the progress of the game is disabled on the main control unit 41 side. Can be prevented.

[Resume order of advantageous section notifications and navigation notifications, etc. when power is restored]
The restarting order of advantageous section notification and navigation notification when returning from the power interruption after the power interruption to stop power supply to the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the AC 100V power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes a power interruption process (not shown) in the timer interrupt process, and the main control unit 41 before the power interruption and the RAM 41c Since the data set in the predetermined area is saved in the storage area of the RAM 41c backed up by the backup power supply, and the backup power is supplied, the data is held. When the power supply to is resumed, it is possible to return to the control state before the power interruption. In particular, whether or not the navigation notification was performed in the control state before the power interruption, the content of the navigation notification when the navigation notification was performed, whether or not it was controlled in the advantageous section, and whether or not the stop operation was effective Can be specified.

  Moreover, when the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes the power interruption process in the same manner as the main control unit 41, so that the control state of each rendering device before the power supply is stopped Is stored in the storage means that is backed up by the backup power source, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed, each rendering device can be returned to the control state before the power interruption. . In particular, in the control state before the power supply is stopped, whether or not the navigation effect is performed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the content of the navigation effect can be specified when the navigation effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section and the AT is controlled and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is displayed. While the lighting state is controlled, navigation notification is performed and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. In addition, when at least one reel is controlled to rotate after the game is started, the stop effective LED of the corresponding reel is controlled to be lit. At this time, a navigation effect is performed on the sub-control unit 91 side, and a navigation image suggesting an operation mode notified by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In this state, when power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and a power interruption occurs, as shown in FIG. 11B, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary indicator 12, and the stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C 22R and the liquid crystal display 51 are all turned off, and all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 11C, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and restarted, the main control unit 41 first stops the power supply to the slot machine 1. The rotation control of the reel that has been controlled to rotate again is resumed (not shown), and after the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped, the timer interruption process is performed. The display of the operation mode of the stop switch by the navigation notification on the game auxiliary indicator 12 and the lighting control of the advantageous section notification LED 12a are restarted at the same time to restart the navigation notification and the advantageous section notification.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11 (d), the main control unit 41 sets the stop switch corresponding to the reel for which the rotation control is performed by rotating all the reels whose rotation control is resumed at a constant speed. The lighting control of the stop valid LED is resumed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11E, the main control unit 41 resumes reel rotation control, navigation notification, advantageous section notification, and stop effective LED lighting control. By identifying that the return processing of the navigation is completed, the sub-control unit 91 resumes the control of the navigation effect, and the navigation image suggesting the operation mode notified by the navigation notification on the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. Resume display.

  Thereby, the control state of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the game auxiliary display 12, the stop valid LED, the reel, and the liquid crystal display 51 is returned to the state before the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. .

  Thus, when the navigation notification and the navigation effect are performed in the advantageous section, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and then the power supply is resumed, so that the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect is changed. When returning to the state before the power supply is stopped, the main control unit 41 controls the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 to be resumed at the same time. Thereby, before the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is resumed, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary indicator 12 is resumed, and the advantageous section notification is not informed that the advantageous section is instructed. The navigation notification can be prevented from being resumed.

  In this embodiment, when the control state of the navigation notification and the navigation effect in the advantageous section is returned to the state before the power supply is stopped, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on and the navigation notification display on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. However, after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is resumed, the navigation notification display on the game auxiliary display 12 may be restarted. In such a configuration, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is advantageous. It is possible to prevent the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display 12 from being restarted before the section notification is restarted.

  Control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[About main processing]
The main control unit 41 is activated when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and executes various processes in accordance with programs stored in the ROM 41b. After the startup, first, the startup setting process is executed to initialize the internal register, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the predetermined output port, and the like included in the main control unit 41, and then the main process is executed. The main process is a process repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and one cycle of the main process corresponds to one unit of game.

  Hereinafter, the control content of the main process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the main process, first, a game start waiting process (Sa1) to be described later that waits until a game is started is executed. Thereafter, an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery is executed when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game (Sa2).

  In the internal lottery process, based on the random number value for internal lottery latched when the start switch 7 is operated in step Sa1, is it allowed to win a winning combination for each lottery target that is the lottery target of the internal lottery ( That is, a process for determining whether or not to permit derivation of a predetermined display result is performed. And the winning number which can identify which lottery object combination (including a loser) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Each lottery target role is assigned a role number in advance, and if any lottery target role is won in the internal lottery, the winning lottery role number is set as the winning number. In the case where it is desired to win also the lottery subject, that is, in the case of losing, 0 is set as the winning number.

  And after performing the internal lottery process in the step of Sa2, the below-mentioned ball-out control process which performs the process regarding a game area is performed (Sa3). Thereafter, a reel control process for controlling the rotation and stop of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is executed (Sa4).

  In the reel control process, after the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to rotate at a predetermined rotational speed, and then the stop switches 8L, 8C, Control is performed to stop the corresponding reel in accordance with the operation of 8R. Further, the reel control process is terminated when the stop control for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is finished and the stop switch related to the third stop operation is released (the stop switch pressing operation is finished). Is done.

  In the reel control process, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate, and then all the reels are rotated at a constant speed, so that the left / middle / right / stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R are controlled to be lit. To do. Thereafter, when the stop switch is operated for the rotating reel, the stop valid LED of the corresponding stop switch is controlled to be turned off.

  In the reel control processing, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have stopped rotating, the combination of symbols constituting the winning combination on the winning line LN is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. To determine whether or not a prize has occurred. If a winning has occurred, a winning flag that can identify the winning combination in which the winning has occurred is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Then, after the reel control process is executed in the step of Sa4, an AT state management process (to be described later) for performing a process related to the end of the advantageous section is executed (Sa5). Thereafter, a medal payout process, which will be described later, is performed to perform a process related to the payout of medals in accordance with the symbol combination stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as a result of the game (Sa6). After that, when a re-game player wins, a re-game operation process to be described later is performed to perform a process of giving a re-game (Sa7).

  After executing the re-game operation process in the step of Sa7, the advantageous section notification flag is set by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section notification flag can be set by the play control process in the step of Sa3 (Sa8). It is determined whether or not (Sa9).

  If it is determined in step Sa9 that the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state control data (light-off) for controlling the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the main CPU 41a). In the accumulator register or the like) (Sa10), and the right side display of the game auxiliary display 12 in the output buffer provided for each output port in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with the state control data (off) of the predetermined register. It is set to an output buffer corresponding to an output port that outputs a control signal to the eighth segment in 12R (hereinafter also referred to as an advantageous section notification LED output buffer) (Sa11). Then, an interrupt once wait process is performed to wait until the timer interrupt process is performed once (Sa12), and the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed by the LED dynamic display process described later executed in the timer interrupt process. After controlling the eighth segment, i.e., the advantageous section notification LED 12a, to the off state, the process proceeds to step Sa13. On the other hand, when it is determined in the step Sa9 that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the process proceeds to the step Sa13 without performing the processes in the steps Sa10 to Sa12.

  When waiting for an interrupt once at the step Sa12 or when it is determined at the step Sa9 that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized at the end of the game. A game end setting process for setting is executed (Sa13). In the game end setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data used only for the game (for example, data indicating a result of winning a general combination in the internal lottery) is set as an initialization target. In addition, when the special role is won in the game and the control of the special state is started, or when the control of the special state is ended, data relating to the special state (for example, data indicating the type of the special state, A predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data for counting the number of medals paid out in a special state is stored is set as an initialization target. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c set as the initialization target is initialized at the start of the next game by the above-described game start waiting process.

  After the game end setting process is executed in step Sa13, the process returns to step Sa1 and steps Sa1 to Sa13 are repeated. When the main process is completed, the process related to the control of one unit of game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

  In the main process, a predetermined command is generated according to the progress of the game and set in the command queue, and a process of transmitting the command to the sub-control unit 91 is appropriately executed.

  Further, in the main process of this embodiment, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section notification LED output buffer is provided every time the game for which the advantageous section notification flag is not set. However, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is in the lit state, the output for the advantageous section notification LED is set. A configuration in which the state control data (light-off) is set in the buffer may be used. In such a configuration, only when the advantageous section notification flag is not set and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is in the lit state, the state control data (turned off) is set in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer. Thus, the process of turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a can be performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Thus, in the main process, when the advantageous section notification flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section notification LED 12a (the eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) is output to the output buffer. When the state control data (lighting) is set and the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to the lighting state, when the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. By setting the control data (light-off) and controlling the lighting state of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the off state, the navigation notification is performed first after the start of the advantageous section, and the payout rate (number of payouts / number of bets) The advantageous section notification LED 12a is lit for the period from the start of the game where the game can exceed 100% to the end of the game where the advantageous section is ended. By controlling the state, it is adapted to notify the subject that are controlled advantageously section.

  Further, in the main process, after executing predetermined processes including a game start waiting process and a reel control process, if the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the state control data (lights off) is output to the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. ) And the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. The reel control process is ended when the third stop operation is ended (a stop switch related to the third stop operation is released), and is advantageous after the third stop operation is ended. The section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. Then, after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off, the game end time setting process is executed, and the process returns to the game start waiting process of the first step, thereby completing the main process. That is, in the main process, after the third stop operation in the game is ended, the control for switching the lighting mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state within the period from the start of the game start waiting process of the next game. Can be done.

  Further, in the main process, after the internal lottery process is performed, the reel control process is performed during the reel control process, and it is controlled in the advantageous section, and the predetermined notification start condition is satisfied. Since the state control data (lighting) is set in the section notification LED output buffer and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, the game is started at the time when a predetermined notification start condition is satisfied. After the start switch 7 for starting is operated, before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for stopping the reels becomes effective, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, and The section notification LED 12a informs that it is controlling to the advantageous section.

  In the main process, after performing the reel control process and the re-game operation process, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section notification flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section notification flag is not set. In this case, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is set in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. At the end of the game in which at least one end condition of .about.3 is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section has ended.

[About the game waiting process]
The control content of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the game start waiting process, first, the value of the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into a predetermined register, and the replay medal counter is initialized and set to 0. (Sb1). In the replay medal counter, a new game is played when a regame player wins and a regame is awarded in the previous game by the regame operation process in the main process related to the previous game. Therefore, a numerical value (3 in the present embodiment) corresponding to the prescribed number of bets necessary for this is set. On the other hand, when no replay is given in the previous game, the value (0) at the time of initialization in the step of Sb1 is maintained.

  Then, based on the value read into the predetermined register in the step of Sb1, it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter is larger than 0 (Sb2). If it is determined in step Sb2 that the value of the replay medal counter is greater than 0, that is, if a regame is awarded in the previous game, medal insertion execution processing is performed (Sb3).

  In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the replay medal counter read in the predetermined register in the step Sb1 is set as the betting number, and the 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16 are set in the lit state, and the prescribed number (this embodiment) Then, control is performed so as to notify that the number of bets 3) is set. When setting the bet number, 1 is subtracted from the value of the predetermined register in which the value of the replay medal counter is read in the step of Sb1, 1 is added to the bet number, and 1 corresponding to the bet number after the addition is added. After the 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the lighting state, the process of controlling the corresponding 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 to the lighting state by the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process is repeated until the value of the replay medal counter becomes 0. When the value of the replay medal counter becomes 0, the process of setting the bet number is completed, and every time the bet number is incremented by 1, 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are turned on. It is controlled sequentially. In addition, the value of the replay medal counter is added to the number of bets at once, all the 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16 are set to the lighting state, and the 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16 are controlled to the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which all of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are simultaneously controlled to be lit in one timer interrupt process.

  After the medal insertion execution process is performed in step Sb3, a medal care permission setting process is performed (Sb4). If it is determined in step Sb2 that the value of the replay medal counter is not greater than 0, that is, if no replay is given in the previous game, the process in step Sb3 is not executed. Proceeding to step Sb4, medal care permission setting processing is performed.

  In the medal care permission setting process, the value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to. If the value of the credit does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) and there is a vacant credit, Referring to the set bet value, if the bet value has not reached the specified number (3 in the present embodiment) and there is a vacant bet number, A medal care permission flag indicating permission to insert medals is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In this embodiment, in the medal care permission setting process, the medal care permission flag is set when there is a vacant credit regardless of whether or not a replay is given. Is granted, even if there is a vacancy in the credit, if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set and there is a vacancy in the number of bets, or if there is a vacancy in the credit and no replay is granted The medal care permission flag may be set.

  After the medal care permission setting process is performed in the step of Sb4, a process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Sb5). By performing the process of waiting for one interrupt, the timer interrupt process is performed, and the detection state of various switches, the lighting state of LEDs, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection state of these various switches is updated. Then, the subsequent processing (for example, medal detection processing and operation input acceptance processing described later) can be performed.

  After a single interrupt process is performed at step Sb5 and a timer interrupt is performed once, the medal care permission flag can be set by the medal care permission setting process described above with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether a maintenance permission flag is set (Sb6).

  If it is determined in step Sb6 that the medal care permission flag is set, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the ON state (energized state) (Sb7). By setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the ON state, the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the hopper tank side, and control is performed so that the medals are taken into the slot machine 1. Further, the lighting mode of the insertion request LED 17 is set to the lighting state (Sb8), and control is performed so as to notify that the medal can be inserted. In addition, after setting the lighting mode of the input request LED 17 to the lighting state, the timer interrupt process is executed, and the LED dynamic display process is performed, whereby the input request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

  Then, after setting the insertion request LED 17 in the lighting state in the step of Sb8, a medal detection process is performed (Sb9). If it is determined that the medal care permission flag is not set in step Sb6, the process proceeds to step Sb9 without performing the processes in steps Sb7 and Sb8, and the medal detection process is performed.

  In the medal detection process, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the transition of the output signal of the inserted medal sensor 31 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal insertion signal) and the medal insertion signal. The medal insertion status is determined based on the transition of the insertion signal. And when insertion of a normal medal is detected, processing for setting a bet number and receiving a medal for credit is performed. On the other hand, when the insertion of an abnormal medal is detected, an error process for controlling the error state to disable the progress of the game is performed. The error state is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38. Note that when the error state is released, the abnormality that caused the error state to be controlled (for example, clogging of medals within the detection range of the inserted medal sensor 31) has not been resolved. It will be controlled to an error state.

  After performing the medal detection process in the step of Sb9, the operation input reception process for receiving the operation by the switch is performed by enabling the operation of various switches and performing the operation of the switch for which the operation is enabled. (Sb10).

  In the operation input reception process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal and the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 1 or more, the operation is accepted by the MAXBET switch 6. Enable. Further, when a medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, if the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is validated. In addition, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the acceptance of the operation by the settlement switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

  Further, in the operation input reception process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation by the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. Thereafter, by setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state (non-energized state), the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the inserted medals are replaced by the player. Control to return to. Further, when an operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected in a state where the operation by the setting key switch 37 is valid, a setting value display process for displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when an operation by the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state where the operation by the settlement switch 10 is valid, a settlement process is performed in which the medal stored in the credit is returned to the player. In addition, when an operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is detected in a state where the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, the number of medals up to a prescribed number is set as the bet number within a possible range based on the credit, and the bet number is set. A process of subtracting the set number of medals from the credit is performed. After performing a process corresponding to the switch in which the operation is detected, the operation input receiving process is terminated.

  After performing the operation input acceptance process in the step of Sb10, it is determined whether an effective operation by the start switch 7 is detected based on the start flag (Sb11). If the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and it is determined that a valid operation by the start switch 7 has not been detected, the process proceeds to step Sb12 and a start valid LED display process for controlling the lighting mode of the start valid LED 18 is performed. (Sb12).

  In the start valid LED display process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be effective by the operation input reception process in step Sb10, the operation of the switches other than the reset switch 23 is not detected. In the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective while the lighting state is set, the operation by the switches other than the reset switch 23 is detected, and the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be effective. If there is not, the start valid LED 18 is set to the off state. Thus, when the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated, the start switch 7 is controlled by turning on the start valid LED 18. Notify that the operation by is effective. In addition, although the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state, when the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or when the operation by the start switch 7 is not set to be effective, the start is effective. By controlling the LED 18 to be turned off, it is notified that the operation by the start switch 7 is invalid.

  After the start valid LED display process is performed in the step Sb12, the process returns to the step Sb5, and the processes in the steps Sb5 to Sb12 are repeated until it is determined that a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected in the step Sb11. Do. After the start valid LED display process is performed in the step Sb12, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to the lighting mode set by the start valid LED display process by performing a one-time interrupt process in the step Sb5. It becomes.

  In step Sb11, when it is determined that a start flag is set in the predetermined register and a valid operation by the start switch 7 is detected, a random number value for internal lottery is acquired from the random number circuit 42, and the predetermined value in the RAM 41c is acquired. The area is set (Sb13). Thereafter, the start valid LED 18 and the insertion request LED 17 are set to the off state (Sb14, Sb15), the medal care permission flag is cleared from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb16), and the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared. (Sb17), the game start waiting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Thereafter, in the main process, an internal lottery process for performing an internal lottery using the random number for internal lottery acquired in the step of Sb13, or the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R One game is started by performing a reel control process for starting rotation and stopping the corresponding reel in response to detection of an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  As described above, in the game start waiting process, when a re-game is given, the medal insertion execution process is executed, the bet number for performing the re-game is set, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are turned on. Control sequentially.

  In the game start waiting process, a medal care permission flag is set. When at least one of the credits and the bet number is empty and a medal can be inserted, the flow of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 The flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in an ON state so that the path is switched to the hopper tank side, and the lighting mode of the input request LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state.

  Further, in the game start waiting process, when the start valid LED display process is performed, the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state and the switches other than the reset switch 23 are not operated. While the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be lit, the operation by the start switch 7 is in a valid state. However, when the switches other than the reset switch 23 are being operated, or the operation by the start switch 7 is effective. If not set, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be turned off.

  Further, in the game start waiting process, when the valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected by the operation input acceptance process, the insertion request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are set to the off state, and the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Is set to clear, the timer interruption process is performed thereafter, the insertion request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 are controlled to be turned off, and the payout number display on the game auxiliary display 12 is erased. Become.

  In the game start waiting process, after the medal insertion execution process (Sb3) is performed, it is possible to perform a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the insertion request LED 17, so that a re-game is given. The number of bets is set in accordance with the re-granting, and after the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled to be lit, the insertion request LED 17 is controlled to be lit.

  Further, in the game start waiting process, in the series of processes (Sb6 to Sb12) after the interrupt once waiting process (Sb5) is performed, a process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of the input request LED 17 is performed, and further the start valid Since the LED display process (Sb12) can be performed, the timer interrupt process after the process (Sb8) for setting the lighting state of these input request LEDs 17 and the start valid LED display process (Sb12) is performed. The request LED 17 and the start valid LED 18 can be controlled to be lit at the same time.

[About the ball control process]
The control content of the ball control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout control process, first, section information that can specify the currently controlled game section is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc1). The section information has an initial value indicating that the currently controlled gaming section is a normal section, and the advantageous section is determined by the corresponding process in the game control process and the AT state management process described later. It can be updated to the indicated value.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section based on the section information acquired in the step of Sc1 (Sc2). When it is determined in the step of Sc2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not an advantageous section, it is referred to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to determine which internal lottery target combination (including a loser) is won in the internal lottery. An identifiable winning number is acquired (Sc3), and it is determined whether or not an advantageous section transition lottery target for performing an advantageous section transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section has been won (Sc4). Each internal lottery target subject to lottery in the internal lottery is pre-assigned a role number, and among the internal lottery target roles, a role number within a predetermined range is preassigned. It has been. Based on whether or not the role number of the internal lottery target specified based on the winning number is a value within a predetermined range, it is possible to determine whether or not the advantageous segment transition lottery target is won. ing.

  Then, when it is determined in the step of Sc4 that the winning section transition lottery target role has been won, an advantageous section transition lottery process for performing the advantageous section transition lottery is executed (Sc5). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to win the advantageous section shift lottery and shift to the advantageous section (Sc6). If it is determined in the step of Sc6 that the advantageous section shift lottery has been won, the section information update data (advantage section) is acquired in a predetermined register (Sc7), and the update data ( (Section 8), the section information is updated to a value indicating the advantageous section (Sc8). Thus, based on the section information (value indicating the advantageous section) updated in the game, the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game, and the advantageous section game described later with the next game as the first game of the advantageous section. The number of games in the advantageous section is counted by the number counter.

  Then, an advantageous section start time setting process is performed for making settings related to the advantageous section that is started when the advantageous section shift lottery is won (Sc9). In the advantageous section start time setting process, processing for initializing advantageous section ending conditions (such as an arbitrary ending condition) to be started according to the type of the winning section to be selected for the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and is performed in the advantageous section. A process for setting a lottery table used for AT lottery, a process for setting various counters used in an advantageous section, and the like are performed.

  And after performing the advantageous section start time setting process in the step of Sc9, the exit control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Further, in the step of Sc4, if it is determined that the advantageous section shift lottery target is not won based on the winning number, and if it is determined in the step of Sc6 that the advantageous section shift lottery is not won, Sc5 Without performing each process of the step of Sc9, the exit control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the step of Sc2 that the currently controlled game section is an advantageous section, the number of games that are continuously controlled to the advantageous section (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an advantageous section game number). In order to count, 1 is added to the advantageous section game number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc10), and then the ball appearance state information set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (the control state relating to the currently controlled AT) Based on the information that can identify the current), the currently controlled ball status (control status related to AT) is acquired in a predetermined register (Sc11), and processing related to the currently controlled ball status is executed. The appearance state related process is performed (Sc12).

  In the ball appearance state-related processing, processing related to the ball appearance state acquired in the predetermined register at the start of the processing, that is, the currently controlled ball appearance state is performed. The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to a later-described non-AT state and AT state (non-hold state, first hold state, second hold state) as a payout state (control state related to AT). In the ball state related processing, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the current control state is terminated and control is performed so as to shift to a control state according to the satisfied transition condition. In addition, various processes are performed according to the currently controlled payout state (see FIG. 23 and the like).

  Further, in the game appearance state related process, it is determined whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game. An arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag indicating that 3) is satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and control is performed to end the advantageous section. As a result, when the gaming state is controlled to be in the non-inside while the gaming state is controlled, the next game of the game that has been transferred to the advantageous zone, that is, one of the advantageous intervals in the non-inside In the game, control is performed to end the advantageous section.

  Also, in the game appearance state related processing, as will be described later, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and the advantageous section notification start condition for starting the advantageous section notification described above is satisfied (in this embodiment, the advantageous section After the start of the advantageous section, the game is controlled to the AT state first, and in the AT state, in the AT state, the navigation target role is first won by the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed by the AT control. First, the navigation notification is performed, and the advantageous section notification flag indicating that the advantageous section notification is to be started is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) starts 100%). Then, control is performed so as to start the control of the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to set an arbitrary end condition establishment flag when the end condition 3 is satisfied, without being based on the value of the navigation game number counter in the appearance state related processing. In the case where the end conditions 1 to 3 are not satisfied, the advantageous section is not ended even if the AT state is ended, but even in the case where the end conditions 1 to 3 are not satisfied in the appearance state related process. Further, the advantageous section may be ended when the AT state is ended. For example, it is determined whether or not the value of a navigation game number counter, which will be described later, becomes 0 in each game in the AT state in the game state related process Then, when it is determined that the value of the navigation game number counter has become 0, an arbitrary end condition establishment flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section is also ended when the AT state ends. It may be formed.

  After the appearance state related process is performed in the step of Sc12, is the arbitrary end condition establishment flag set with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the arbitrary end condition establishment flag can be set by the appearance state related process? It is determined whether or not the arbitrary end condition is satisfied based on whether or not (Sc13). If the arbitrary end condition satisfaction flag is set, and it is determined that the arbitrary end condition is satisfied, an advantageous section end flag setting process is performed (Sc14), and an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is ended is displayed. A predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set.

  Then, after the advantageous section end flag setting process is performed in the step of Sc14, is the advantageous section notification flag set by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section notification flag can be set by the appearance state related process? It is determined whether or not (Sc15). Further, in the step of Sc13, if it is determined that the arbitrary end condition establishment flag is not set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the process of the step of Sc14 is not performed, but the process of the step of Sc15 is performed, and the advantageous section notification flag Is determined (Sc15).

  If it is determined in the step Sc15 that the advantageous section notification flag is set, the state control data (lighting) for controlling the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the lighting state is read into a predetermined register. (Sc16) After the state control data (lighting) of the predetermined register is set in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer (Sc17), the process waits for one interrupt (Sc18) and is executed in the timer interrupt process. The display mode of the eighth segment, that is, the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be in the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing described later. Thereafter, an instruction setting process for setting the navigation notification is performed (Sc19). On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Sc15 that the advantageous section notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to the step of Sc19 without performing each process in the steps of Sc16 to Sc18, and an instruction setting process is performed (Sc19).

  In the instruction setting process, when it is determined that the control state related to the AT (the ball-out state) is controlled to the AT state and the navigation target combination is selected in the internal lottery, the navigation corresponding to the navigation target combination is performed. The notification is executed, and the operation mode (for example, pressing order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the navigation target role is notified using the game auxiliary display 12. At the same time, control is performed so that a command capable of specifying the operation mode is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, if the control state related to the AT is not controlled to the AT state, the stop switch 8L, 8C, which is advantageous to the player, is not executed even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. Control is performed so that a command capable of specifying the 8R operation mode is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  Then, after performing the instruction setting process in the step of Sc19, the present ball control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  In this way, in the ball exit control process, the control is performed in the advantageous section, and when the predetermined advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the state control data (lighting) is set in the advantageous section notification LED output buffer. Since the display mode of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on at the start of the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a controls the advantageous section. It can be notified that it has been.

  Further, in the game playing control process, when the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section, 1 is always added to the advantageous section game number counter for each game, and the number of games played in the advantageous section is counted. Thereby, in the AT state management process described later, based on the advantageous section game number counter, it is determined that the number of games played in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). In such a case, the advantageous section is controlled to end, so that the advantageous section does not exceed the upper limit number of games, and it is possible to prevent the long-term medal payout rate from becoming excessive.

  In the payout control process of this embodiment, when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, that is, after the start of the advantageous section, the navigation notification is performed first, and the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) is 100%. The advantageous section notification is controlled so as to start the advantageous section notification by the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of a game that can be exceeded, but the advantageous section notification is first performed after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. It may be configured to start at a predetermined timing in a period until a game in which the payout rate (the number of payouts / the number of bets) can exceed 100% after notification is made. For example, the game section is moved from the normal section to the advantageous section. The advantageous section notification is started by a configuration in which the advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game, or after a predetermined number of games are performed after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. Configurations, after the game section is shifted from the normal interval Advantageously interval, a predetermined symbol combination reel 2L predetermined, 2C, may be configured such that advantageously interval notification by stopping the 2R is started.

  Further, in the payout control processing of the present embodiment, the advantageous section notification is performed at the beginning of the game in which the navigation notification is first performed after the start of the advantageous section and the payout rate (number of payouts / number of bets) can exceed 100%. Although it is the structure which is started and is complete | finished with the completion | finish of an advantageous area, the advantageous area alerting | reporting is that predetermined | prescribed termination conditions are satisfied in the period from the start of an advantageous area until the said advantageous area is complete | finished (for example, For example, the configuration may be such that it can be temporarily terminated when the AT state is terminated.

  In the exit control process, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the end condition 3 of the advantageous section is satisfied. By determining and controlling to end the advantageous section at the end of the game, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside. As a result, when the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and when the advantageous interval is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous interval is Since the advantageous section is terminated in the game that has been started, even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the inside where the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate, before the player plays the game The advantageous section will end, and the game will not be played by the player in the advantageous section, that is, the state that has been shifted to the advantageous state at the game store side, so the fairness is lost when the player plays the game Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the advantageous section when it is established that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit as an end condition of the advantageous section. In such a configuration, if the advantageous section is controlled so as not to end in the game in which the advantageous section has started, if the advantageous section is controlled to be the advantageous section in the non-inside, the advantageous section transferred in the non-inside is in the inside. Will continue even after the transition. Then, in the advantageous section transferred to the non-inside, the number of games that can be played in the inside until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is less than the advantageous section transferred in the inside. The game will be reduced by the number of games played in the interior, and if a player plays a game in an advantageous section that has been transferred to a non-inside, fairness will be lost. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the advantageous section has started, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. Even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game shop side plays until it becomes inside, the advantageous section ends before the player plays the game, and the fairness is lost when the player plays the game Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal for each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the game. By controlling so that the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, but the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started. For example, only in the first game of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal, and if it is determined that the game state is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. It may be configured to control to end the section.

[About AT status management processing]
The control contents of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the AT state management process, first, section information set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in a predetermined register (Sd1). Then, based on the section information, it is determined whether or not the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section (Sd2).

  If it is determined in the step Sd2 that the currently controlled gaming section is an advantageous section, the advantageous section is referred to by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag can be set by the above-mentioned ball control process. It is determined whether or not an end flag is set (Sd3). If it is determined in step Sd3 that the advantageous section end flag has not been set, refer to the advantageous section game number counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is updated in the above-described ball control processing ( Sd4) Based on the advantageous section game number counter, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section game number has reached the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) (Sd5).

  If it is determined in step Sd5 that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit, the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (paid in the advantageous section). Refer to the net increase counter for counting the total number of medals issued by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the number of bets in the advantageous section (Sd6). The value is acquired in a predetermined register as a net increase number value. Then, the payout number value of medals to be paid out is specified based on the winning flag of the game, and the payout number value is added to the net increase number value of the predetermined register (Sd7). Thereafter, the bet value set in the game is specified, and a new net increase value is calculated by subtracting the bet value from the net increase value in the predetermined register (Sd8). Then, it is determined whether or not the new net increase value calculated in the predetermined register is 0 or more (Sd9).

  If it is determined in step Sd9 that the value of the net increase in the predetermined register is not 0 or more, the value of the net increase in the predetermined register is set to 0 (Sd10), and the process proceeds to step Sd11. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd9 that the net increment value in the predetermined register is 0 or more, the processing in step Sd10 is not performed, the net increment value in the predetermined register is maintained, and the process proceeds to step Sd11. .

  In the step of Sd11, the net increase value set in the predetermined register is set to the specified number (in this embodiment, 2388 (the maximum value (15) of the number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from the upper limit number 2400), and It is determined whether or not the maximum number (three) added for setting the bet number)) has been exceeded (Sd11). In the step of Sd11, when it is determined that the net increase number value of the predetermined register does not exceed the specified number, the net increase number value of the predetermined register is set in the net increase number counter of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, thereby the net increase number counter. Is updated to a new net increase number value (Sd12).

  After updating the net increment counter in step Sd12 to a new net increment value, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. Also, when it is determined in step Sd2 that the currently controlled gaming section is not an advantageous section, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set in step Sd3, if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number in step Sd5, the medal in the advantageous section is determined in step Sd11. If it is determined that the net increase number exceeds the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sd13, and a predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored is initialized to select the advantageous section. An advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) to be ended is performed.

  In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of storage areas (2 in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the process is set as the initialization area section in the predetermined register (D) (Sd13). . The RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, the number of included addresses) correspond to the values indicated by the number of sections. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which the set table is stored is set in a predetermined register (HL) (Sd14). Thereafter, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses of the initialization target area is set in the predetermined register (B), and the value of the head address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is obtained as the initialization target RAM address. The predetermined register (C) is set (Sd15).

  Then, after initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address set in the predetermined register (C) is set in the predetermined area. By setting the initialization data set in the register (A), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sd17). Thereafter, the value of the predetermined register (C) is incremented by 1 to advance the initialization target RAM address by 1 (Sd18).

  Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), 1 is subtracted from the remaining address number (Sd19), and then it is determined whether the remaining address number is greater than 0 (Sd20). If it is determined in step Sd20 that the number of remaining initial addresses is greater than zero, the process returns to step Sd17, and the processes in steps Sd17 to Sd20 are repeated until the number of remaining addresses becomes zero. As a result, the storage area corresponding to the number of storage areas to be initialized (the number of addresses) from the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table, is the initialization data. It is initialized.

  When it is determined in step Sd20 that the number of remaining addresses is not larger than 0, that is, when all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table are initialized, the value of the predetermined register (D) 1 is subtracted from the value indicated by the number of sections of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sd21), and it is determined whether the value indicated by the number of sections after the subtraction is 0 (Sd22). If the value indicated by the number of partitions is not 0, the process returns to step Sd15, and the number of storage areas to be initialized next is acquired from the RAM initialization table based on the value indicated by the number of partitions, The number of area addresses is set in the predetermined register (B), and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of sections of the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the RAM initialization table. After setting the initialization target RAM address in the predetermined register (C) (Sd15), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A) (Sd16), and each of the steps of Sd16 to Sd20 is performed. By repeatedly performing the processing until the number of addresses becomes 0, the storage area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of storage areas of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating the processes in steps Sd15 to Sd22 until the number of storage areas becomes zero, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of sections is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of storage areas in the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control in the advantageous section includes data related to the control of the AT state, and the predetermined area in which the data related to the control in the advantageous section in the RAM 41c is stored by the advantageous section data initialization processing. Is initialized, the data related to the control in the advantageous section and the data relating to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is terminated and the AT state is terminated.

  In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage areas in the two predetermined sections in the RAM 41c are initialized. The RAM 41c may be configured to initialize one predetermined storage area or three or more storage areas.

  As described above, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the advantageous section is being controlled, the storage area of the RAM 41c is increased along with the termination of the advantageous section control. An advantageous section data initialization process for initializing a predetermined area in which data related to the control in the advantageous section is stored is executed, and the control of the advantageous section is terminated.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 sets an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be ended in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when an arbitrary end condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied in the above-described play control process. . Then, in the AT state management process, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section end flag is set by the payout control process, if the advantageous section end flag is set, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed. If the advantage section end flag is not set while determining that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the number of advantageous section games is determined. When it is determined that has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to terminate the control of the advantageous section. In this case, by referring to the advantageous section end flag, the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games can be omitted, and the control of the advantageous section can be ended. It has become way.

  In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of games controlled in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) when controlled in the advantageous section. If it is determined based on the value of the section game number counter and the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initial is set without setting the advantageous section end flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Control is executed so as to terminate the control of the advantageous section. The advantageous section end condition is changed to the advantageous section game, which is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). The end condition may be satisfied when the number exceeds the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games (1499 in this embodiment).

  In this embodiment, when an arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the payout control process, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and then the advantageous section end flag is set in the AT state management process. On the other hand, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed to control the advantageous section to be ended. In the AT state management process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section is determined in advance. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed without setting the advantageous section end flag, and the control of the advantageous section is ended. However, even when an arbitrary end condition is satisfied in the ball exit control process, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section in the AT state management process is determined by a predetermined upper limit game. Even when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by reaching the number of times, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section is set based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set. A configuration for executing data initialization processing may also be used.

  In the AT state management process, when an advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a prescribed number Then, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the advantageous section (including data related to the AT state), thereby terminating the advantageous section.

  In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section is terminated. By setting the prescribed number to the predetermined number, the advantage over the predetermined number of games can be obtained. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the medal payout rate in the section is within a predetermined ratio. For example, the specified number is 2388 (a value obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the payout number in the slot machine 1 from 2400 as the upper limit number and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet number) ), The net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section can be made 2400 or less, and the medal payout rate between 1600 games can be made within 150%. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of medals from being paid out in the slot machine 1 in a predetermined period. It should be noted that the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is replaced with an end condition established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment). The same applies to the case where the termination condition is reached by reaching the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined number (2389 in this embodiment). Note that the end condition of the advantageous section is replaced with the end condition established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number (2388 in this embodiment). The end condition may be reached when the net increase in the number of medals reaches a number obtained by adding 1 to a predetermined number (2389 in this embodiment).

  In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. When the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, by ending the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a long time, and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number When the number exceeds the upper limit, the AT state and the advantageous section are terminated to prevent the advantageous section from continuing if the payout rate increases rapidly even if the number of advantageous section games does not reach the upper limit number of games. It is like that.

  In the AT state management process, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section data is initialized and the advantageous section is terminated. First, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). If it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is determined. Advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) without performing the process of counting the number of sheets (Sd6 to Sd10) and the process of determining whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the prescribed number (Sd11). I do. As a result, when it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied because the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the net increase in the number of medals, which is the condition for ending the advantageous section, is set to the specified number. Since the process for determining exceeding (Sd11) and the process (Sd6 to Sd10) for counting the net increase in number of medals initialized at the end of the advantageous section are not performed, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the AT state management process of this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5), and it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. If it is determined that the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit number of games while determining whether the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the prescribed number In this configuration (Sd11), first, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone has exceeded the prescribed number. If it is determined that the net increase has exceeded the prescribed number, the advantageous zone is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the net increase number does not exceed the prescribed number while the process to be ended is performed, it may be determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. In such a configuration, as a result of the slot machine 1 design, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number as a condition for ending the advantageous section as compared to the number of advantageous section games reaching the upper limit number of games. In a configuration in which it is easy to establish, it is possible to preferentially determine whether or not the net increase in number of medals, which is an end condition that is highly likely to be satisfied, exceeds a specified number, and when the end condition is satisfied, the other end The processing burden can be reduced without determining the conditions.

  In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). If it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, It is determined whether or not the net increased number of medals exceeds a specified number (Sd11), and if it is determined that the net increased number of medals exceeds a specified number, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to be advantageous. When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games while the section is controlled to end, a process (Sd11) is performed to determine whether or not the net increase in number of medals exceeds a specified number. The advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to control the end of the advantageous section, and the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. Even when one of the cases where the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number is established, or when both are established in the same game, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed. ) To finish the advantageous section. As a result, either of the cases where the advantageous section end condition is that both the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. The advantageous section can be terminated by performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same area is initialized without difference from the case where only the above is established.

  In the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games (Sd5). If it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games, It is determined whether or not the net increase in number of medals exceeds a specified number (Sd11). If it is determined that the number of net increase in medals exceeds a specified number, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to be advantageous. When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games while the section is controlled to end, a process (Sd11) is performed to determine whether or not the net increase in number of medals exceeds a specified number. If the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed and the advantageous section is controlled to end, the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit number of games. , Even if the net increase number of medals in the preferred interval exceeds a predetermined number, it is configured to terminate advantageously section performs common advantageously section data initialization processing (Sd13~Sd22). As a result, the common advantageous section data is set regardless of whether the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number as the end condition of the advantageous section. Since the initialization process is performed, the advantageous section can be terminated by performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) in which the same region is initialized without any difference.

  In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the value of the net increase number counter is acquired as a net increase number value in a predetermined register, the payout number value is added to the net increase number value, and the bet value is subtracted. If the value obtained is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, and the number of medals increases or decreases as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). When the value is smaller than the reference value (the value of the net increase at the start of the advantageous section (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase counter is 0, and when the increase / decrease in the number of medals is increasing, the increase tends to increase. The increment / decrement number after that becomes the value of the net increment counter.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), after the shift to the advantageous section, navigation notification is not performed, and the number of medals increases and decreases, and the net increase number is increased by adding the increase / decrease number to the net increase counter. When the value of the counter is less than the initial value (0 in this embodiment), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0 over a period in which the increase / decrease number of medals is below the initial value. Thereafter, when the AT state is controlled and the stop operation is performed according to the navigation notification, the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, the value of the net increase counter is the value for the net increase of medals ( The value obtained by subtracting the betting value from the payout number value) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the value of the net increase counter is the reference value when the increase / decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increase trend, that is, the increase / decrease number of medals when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value. It is a value indicating the number of sheets increased from the value.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, after the number of medals increased or decreased once exceeds the initial value of the net increase counter, it tends to decrease and again falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment). In such a case, the number of medals increases or decreases to 0 over a period in which the number of medals is less than the initial value. Thereafter, as the number of medals increases or decreases, the value of the net increase counter is updated by sequentially adding a value corresponding to the net increase of medals (a value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number). As a result, the value of the net increase counter is a value indicating the increase from the reference value with the increase / decrease number of medals as the reference value when the increase / decrease number of medals becomes the lowest value. .

  In the AT state management process, an arithmetic value obtained by adding the payout number of medals in the game to the net increase counter value and subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase counter value in the advantageous section is 0. If it is larger, the value obtained by adding the payout number value to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value is set and updated in the net increase number counter, while if the calculated value is smaller than 0, When the process of setting and updating 0 in the net increase number counter is performed every game, and the net increase number becomes a negative value in the advantageous section, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0 and the net increase number is counted again from 0. Since the net increase counter is updated so that the number of medals increases (net increase) in the transition of actual medal increase / decrease in the advantageous section, the net increase count is updated. It is possible to identify directly as pointer value (see FIG. 16 (a)).

  In this embodiment, the process of updating the net increase counter during the advantageous zone is performed, so that the counting of the net increase in medals is started after the shift to the advantageous zone, and the net increase in the advantageous zone is started. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, the processing for updating the net increase number counter is not performed when the AT state is not performed during the advantageous section, and the processing for updating the net increase number counter is performed when there is the AT state during the advantageous section. good. Even in such a configuration, when the navigation notification is not performed in the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals does not increase, and the navigation notification is performed in the AT state, so that the net increase in the number of medals increases. Similarly to the configuration for performing the process of updating the net increase counter when it is in the middle, it is possible to count the net increase of medals in the advantageous section.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16 (a), for example, in a period in which navigation notification is not performed after the transition to the advantageous section, a payout rate exceeding 1 does not occur, and the number of medals increases or decreases to a reference value. In the case of a change to fall below, after the transition to the advantageous section, the number of medals increased or decreased from the game in which the transition to the AT state and the navigation notification started, and the net increase in the advantageous section in the game Is the least. In addition, even when the navigation notification is not performed after the shift to the advantageous section, a payout with a payout rate exceeding 1 may occur. If a payout with a payout rate exceeding 1 occurs during the period so that the increase / decrease in the number of medals during the period is monotonously increasing, the net increase in the advantaged section will be The least. In addition, if the payout rate exceeds 1 in that period so that the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase after the increase / decrease number of medals once falls below the reference value in that period, In this game, the net increase in the advantageous section is the smallest. Thus, the point in time when the number of net increase is the smallest in the advantageous section can change depending on the situation. In contrast, in the process of updating the medal net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment obtains the value of the net increase number counter as a net increase number value in a predetermined register, and pays out the sheet to the net increase number value. If the value obtained by adding the numerical value and subtracting the betting value is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, so that the number of medals increased / decreased from decreasing to increasing The net increase number counter is reset, and the net increase value is counted again from 0, and the net increase number is counted from the point where the net increase number becomes the smallest in the advantageous section, and the accurate net increase number is counted. Can be done.

  Further, in this embodiment, by performing processing for updating the net increase counter when it is in the advantageous zone, counting of the net increase in medals is started after the shift to the advantageous zone, and the net increase in the advantageous zone is started. Although the configuration is such that the number of sheets is counted, a configuration in which the process of updating the net increase number counter may be performed regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section. In such a configuration, when the net increase in the number of medals tends to increase in the section before the transition to the advantageous section, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is taken over by taking over the net increase in the number of medals in the section. Can be done.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate can be set to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification. The stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification, so that the medal payout rate is less than 1, and in the AT state, According to the navigation notification, the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase, while in the state other than the AT state, the increase / decrease number of medals tends to decrease. Therefore, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit in the AT state. Thus, the fact that the increase / decrease number of medals tends to increase in the advantageous section is notified.

  In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case, the common advantageous section data initialization process (Sd13 to Sd22) is performed to initialize the advantageous section (including the data related to the AT state) to thereby determine the advantageous section. In the configuration to be terminated, that is, in the AT state management process, regardless of the termination condition of the established advantageous section, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the data relating to the advantageous section in the same manner and the advantageous section is terminated. However, at the end of the advantageous section, the data related to the advantageous section according to the end condition of the established advantageous section is initialized. To, it may be configured to terminate the advantageous period.

  In the present embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. If a predetermined small combination with a payout of a prize is won, regardless of whether the predetermined small combination is won and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game, the predetermined small combination is won and the medal is paid out. It may be considered that the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted by adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase counter. In such a configuration, when a predetermined small combination is won by an internal lottery in an advantageous section, it is considered that the predetermined small combination has won and a medal has been paid out, and the medals for the payout are counted as a net increase number counter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the net increase counter from intentionally extending the number of games in the advantageous section without causing the net increase counter to exceed the specified number by intentionally missing the predetermined small combination.

  In addition, when a predetermined small role is won in the internal lottery, the predetermined small role is won and the medal is awarded regardless of whether the predetermined small role is won and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game. In a configuration that counts the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section by adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase counter, assuming that the medals have been paid out, a lottery that includes a small part with a medal payout in an internal lottery Regardless of whether or not the player is able to win the small role when the target role is won, if the small role wins, the payout will be made by winning the small role. In addition to adding the number of medals to the net increase counter, it is possible for a player to win a prize for a prize when a lottery target part including a small part with a medal payout is won in an internal lottery. The situation Regardless, if the winning combination could not be won, for example, an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous for the player by winning the navigation target role as a lottery target role in the internal lottery, Although being notified, it is possible to win a predetermined small combination included in the navigation target combination, but a predetermined small combination is won by being operated in an operation mode different from the notified operation mode. If a specific small role is won and it is operated in a certain operation mode (operation at the operation timing that will be the drawing range of the specific role, etc.), the specific small role can be awarded. Despite this, if a specific small role could not be won by operating in an operation mode other than a certain mode of operation, the small role that the player was able to win Assuming that a medal has been paid out after winning a prize, the number of medals that are paid out is added to the net increase counter, so that the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is counted, while medals are paid out in an internal lottery. When a lottery role including a small role is won, if the player cannot win a prize in a situation where it is impossible for the player to win the small role reliably, for example, an internal lottery In a situation where the navigation target combination is won and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, which is advantageous to the player through the navigation notification, is not notified, the predetermined small combination included in the navigation target combination can be won. If not, it is preferable not to add to the net increase number counter, and this configuration ensures that the player can increase medals reliably. If the situation is not possible, the net increase counter is added only when the number of medals actually increases, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In this embodiment, when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter to set the bet amount. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of the medal used in the above is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0. In the case of being less than 0, the numerical value below 0 is not counted, and only the numerical value exceeding 0 is counted, but after the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase number counter to 0 by the start of the advantageous section, When a medal is paid out in the advantageous section, the value of the number of medals paid out is added to the net increase counter, and when the medal is used for setting the bet number, By repeatedly performing the process of subtracting the minute value from the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted to count whether the increase / decrease number of medals is below 0 or above 0 But it ’s okay. In such a configuration, when the increase / decrease number of medals is less than 0, the net increase counter is not corrected to 0, so that the process of counting the net increase by the net increase counter can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medal payouts paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and the medals used for setting the bet number When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of 1 is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and when the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increase number counter. By controlling so that the value of the net increase counter is updated so as to be the value of the value, the net increase in the number of medals is counted starting from when the net increase in medals has decreased most after the start of the advantageous section. Since the timing at which the net increase in medals decreases most after the start of the advantageous section can vary depending on the situation, the starting point of the net increase in medals identified based on the net increase counter in this embodiment depends on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 starts counting the number of net increase of medals by the net increase number counter from the time when it is uniformly set after the start of the advantageous section, and A configuration may also be adopted in which the net increase in medals up to now as the starting point is counted, and the advantageous section is terminated when the net increase in medals exceeds a specified number.

  For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals until the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous interval, and when the net increase in medals exceeds a prescribed number, the advantageous interval As a configuration for ending, the counting by the net increase counter is started from the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the net increase in medals up to the present starting from the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is the specified number. When it exceeds, the structure which terminates an advantageous area may be sufficient. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase in medals starting from other than when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the above, so that the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter can be simplified.

  Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number As the configuration for ending the advantageous section, after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, it is suggested that the transition to the AT state is made by the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and when the operation mode for increasing the medal is notified by the navigation notification, The configuration may be such that when the net increase in the number of medals as the starting point exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is shifted to. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a changes the advantageous section to the advantageous section. It is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from other than when the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification, and it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section. Control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the counter can be simplified.

  Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, it is suggested that the transition to the AT state is performed by the advantageous section notification LED 12a regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing the medal is notified by the navigation notification after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. If the net increase in the number of medals up to the present time starting from the current time exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section may be ended and the normal section may be shifted to. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the medals by navigation notification Regardless of whether or not the mode has been notified, it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from a point other than when the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the transition to the advantageous section has been suggested. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

  In the present embodiment, the AT state management process is configured to control the end of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. However, in the AT state management process, the betting is performed in each game. Without counting the number of medals used for setting the number, only the number of medals to be paid out in each game is counted, and the advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined prescribed number. Such a configuration may be used. For example, the specified number of payouts is 2865 (a net increase (2400) where the payout rate of medals between 1600 games is 150%) and the shortest number of games (160 games = 2400/1) to which the net increase is given. Based on the sum of the number of medals used for setting the number of bets (480 = 160 games x the specified number of 3 per game) in the maximum number of payouts per game (15)), payout per game in the slot machine 1 By subtracting the maximum number (15) of the number of sheets), the advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. The maximum net increase in medals to be paid out in 1600 can be less than 2400, and the medal payout rate between 1600 games should be within 150% It can be. It should be noted that the same effect can be achieved by a configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated when the total number of medals paid out in the game in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (specified number + 1).

[About medal payout processing]
The details of the medal payout process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the medal payout process, first, a winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in a predetermined register (Se1), and a winning number / payout number command setting process is performed (Se2). In the winning number / payout number command setting process, a winning combination identified based on a winning flag set and acquired in a predetermined register is paid out along with a winning number that can identify the winning combination and winning of the winning combination. The command queue is set so that a command capable of specifying the number of medals is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Note that the commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interrupt process.

  After performing the winning number / payout number command setting process in the Se2 step, the medal payout number to be paid out with the winning of the winning combination identified based on the winning flag obtained in the Se1 step is acquired (Se3). The medal payout number is set as a remaining number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se4).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of sheets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is 0 (Se5), and when it is determined that the remaining number of sheets is not 0, it is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, The credit counter that can identify the number of credits is referred to (Se6), and it is determined whether or not the credit has reached the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (Se7). .

  If it is determined in step Se7 that the credit has not reached the upper limit, the value of the credit counter is incremented by 1 (Se8), and a medal payout process is performed (Se9). In the medal payout process, based on the value of the credit counter, data for displaying a value corresponding to the value of the credit counter is set in the output buffer of the credit indicator 11, and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. 1 is subtracted from the remaining number, and the number of medals set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is added to the number of medals that can be specified, and a value corresponding to the number of medals after the addition is displayed. Processing for setting the data to be executed in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is performed. The initial value of the number of paid-out medals is 0, and the number of paid-out medals is initialized at the end of one game.

  After performing the medal payout process in the Se9 step, a credit payout interval waiting process is performed (Se10). In the credit payout interval waiting process, a predetermined waiting time (in this embodiment, a time during which a player or the like can visually recognize changes in the display contents of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12, for example, one medal) The payout interval waiting process is terminated when the waiting time elapses for about 0.16 seconds for each payout. By performing a credit payout interval waiting process, a timer interrupt process is performed during a predetermined waiting time, and the display modes of the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 correspond to the data set in each output buffer. It will be updated to the display mode. In addition, the value of the credit counter updated by the processing at the time of paying out medals and the number of paid-out medals are displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 for at least a predetermined waiting time. A player or the like can visually recognize a change in the display content of the display 12.

  After performing the credit payout interval waiting process in the Se10 step, the process returns to the Se5 step, and the processes in the Se5 to Se10 steps are repeated until the remaining number set in the RAM 41c becomes zero. If it is determined in step Se5 that the remaining number is 0, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  If it is determined in step Se7 that the credit has reached the upper limit number based on the credit counter, a hopper payout process is performed (Se11). In the hopper payout process, the hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven, and every time the payout sensor of the hopper unit 35 detects the payout of one medal, the remaining number set in the RAM 41c is decremented by 1, and the payout has been completed. After adding 1 to the number of medals, the process of setting the data for displaying the value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is repeated until the remaining number becomes 0. . Thus, every time a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 35, the display of the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated. Then, when the remaining number becomes 0, the hopper motor is stopped and the hopper payout process is ended.

  After performing the hopper payout process in the step of Se11, the medal payout process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  In this way, in the medal payout process, when a winning of a small role occurs, and there is a vacant credit, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of the small role is added to the credit within the range up to the upper limit of the credit. When there is no available credit, the number of medals that could not be added to the credit is paid out from the hopper unit through the medal payout opening 9.

  Also, in the medal payout process, when a prize for a small role occurs and a medal is paid out to the credit, every time one medal is added to the credit, the medal payout process is performed and the number of paid-out medals is displayed. After the data to be executed is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the timer interruption process is performed by performing the credit payout interval waiting process, and the data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Based on the data, the display of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is updated, and the display on the game auxiliary indicator 12 is maintained in an updated state until a predetermined waiting time elapses. Repeat. As a result, when a prize for a small role occurs and medals are paid out to credits, the display of the number of medals paid out on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially performed over a predetermined time (the number of medals paid out to the credits × waiting time). Updated.

  Further, in the medal payout process, when a small role winning is generated and the medal is paid out from the hopper unit, the hopper payout process is performed, and a predetermined time corresponding to the number of medals paid out (for example, 100 ms per medal) The hopper motor of the hopper unit 35 is driven over and the data for displaying the number of medals paid out is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 every time the payout sensor detects the payout of one medal. To do. Then, the timer interruption process is performed during the time corresponding to the number of paid-out medals, so that the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated based on the data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Accordingly, the display of the medal payout number on the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated over time corresponding to the medal payout number.

[Processing during re-game operation]
The control contents of the re-game operation process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the re-game operation process, first, a winning flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sf1), and it is determined whether or not the re-game player has won a prize based on the winning flag. Determine (Sf2).

  If it is determined in step Sf2 that the re-game player has won, a re-game operating flag that can specify that the re-game is to be operated in the next game is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf 3). The medal counter setting process is performed (Sf4). In the replay medal counter setting process, the specified number of bets in the game is specified, and the specified number of bets in the game as a replay medal is stored in the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A minute value (3 in this embodiment) is set.

  After the replay medal counter setting process is performed in the step of Sf4, the lighting mode of the replaying LED 20 is set to the lighting state (Sf5), and the process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Sf6). In step Sf6, the one-time interrupt waiting process is performed, whereby the timer interrupt process is executed, the LED dynamic display process is performed, and the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit.

  After the waiting process for one interrupt is performed in step Sf6, the re-game operation process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined in step Sf2 that the re-game player has not won based on the winning flag, the re-game operation process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  Thus, in the re-game operation process, when the re-game player wins in the game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit.

  In the re-game activation process, when a re-game player wins in the game, a re-game medal is set in the re-game medal counter so that the re-game can be performed at the start of the game start waiting process in the next game. The medal is set as the bet number, and the specified number of bets is set, so that the replay can be performed.

[About timer interrupt processing]
The control content of the timer interrupt process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The timer interrupt process is a process performed by the main control unit 41 at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process is set to a time longer than the combined time of the process that repeats depending on the control state in the main process and the execution time of the timer interrupt process. The process repeated according to the control state is always completed with the timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the timer interrupt process includes an LED dynamic display process, and the LED dynamic display process is executed every time the timer interrupt process is performed.

  In the LED dynamic display processing, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, insertion request LED 17, start valid LED 18, waiting LED 19, replaying Control for setting a lighting signal for dynamically lighting the lighting state of the LED 20 etc. according to the state of the output buffer set by each processing such as the main processing, and transmitting the lighting signal to the lighting control circuit of the display such as various LEDs Etc. By performing the LED dynamic display process, the indicators such as various LEDs are controlled in a lighting mode according to the data set in the corresponding output buffer.

  In the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, although not shown in particular, the main interruption determination process for detecting the occurrence of a power interruption (the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped) Data set in a predetermined area of the register of the control unit 41 and the RAM 41c is backed up by a backup power source, and even if power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the stored contents are preserved as long as power is supplied by the backup power source. Power generation processing for saving to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing for initializing a predetermined output port when the power interruption occurs, and data capable of specifying the detection status of various switches based on the detection state of various switches Processing, processing for updating various predetermined timers set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, predetermined external output to the outside of the slot machine 1 A process of transmitting a signal, a process of transmitting various commands set in the command queue, an excitation signal is transmitted to the reel motor 32 of the reel unit 34 according to the progress of the game, etc., thereby driving and stopping each reel. Processes are included, and various processes are executed in a predetermined order.

[Transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator at the start of the advantageous section]
After the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous section notification is started, the gaming auxiliary indicator 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, 1 The transition of the display mode of -3BETLED14-16 is demonstrated based on FIG.

  The main control unit 41 executes the main process described above, and performs a game start waiting process and a ball exit control process, so that at the start of the game, the game auxiliary indicator 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, and the replaying The display modes of the LEDs 20 and 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, in the game start waiting process, the insertion request LED 17 starts to be lit when there is a vacant credit or bet and it is possible to insert medals. Thereafter, the betting number is set by inserting medals or by operating the MAXBET switch 6, whereby the corresponding 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 are sequentially turned on. Then, when the specified number of bets is set, lighting of the start valid LED 18 is started. When the re-gamer wins and the re-game is awarded in the previous game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit for the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

  In this state, when the start switch 7 is operated, the game is started and an internal lottery is performed. Then, in the exit control process, after the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied and the advantageous section notification flag is set, after the state control data (lighting) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the interrupt is performed. When the waiting process is performed once, lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started.

  Then, after the waiting once interrupt process is performed, the navigation for displaying the navigation number suggesting the operation mode corresponding to the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery by the instruction setting process during the payout control process. The display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, timer interrupt processing is performed, so that each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 corresponding to the navigation number (3 in this embodiment) (in this embodiment, the first, third, fourth, and left of the left display 12L). , 6 and 7 segments and the fourth segment of the right side display 12R) start to light. That is, after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 showing the navigation number is turned on.

  Then, after the exit control process is completed, the reel control process is performed, and after the elapse of the weight, that is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the previous game, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated. Will be started.

  Further, the main control unit 41 transmits, to the sub-control unit 91, a command capable of specifying the operation mode suggested by the navigation notification when performing the navigation notification in the instruction setting process during the ball exit control process. Control to do. On the other hand, when the sub control unit 91 specifies that navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side at the start of the game based on the command received from the main control unit 41. The navigation effect control is executed, and a navigation image suggesting an operation mode suggested by the navigation notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the sub-control unit 91 may be controlled to the effect that the advantageous section notification is started, that is, the AT state, when it is specified on the main control section 41 side that the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. The AT confirmation notification for notifying the confirmation is performed using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Since the instruction setting process on the main control unit 41 side is performed after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, the navigation effect by the sub control section 91 is performed after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. It becomes.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 performs control so as to start the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied in the ball exit control process performed at the start of the game. At the start of the game where the condition is established, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on to start the advantageous section notification for notifying that the advantageous section is controlled.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the game auxiliary display 12 to start displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the ball control process. By the time the navigation notification is started at 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on to notify that the advantageous section has started.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by performing the reel control process after controlling the game auxiliary display 12 to start the navigation notification in the game control process. After the game is started in accordance with the operation of the start switch 7, the game auxiliary display 12 starts navigation notification until the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to rotate at a constant speed.

  In this embodiment, in the ball exit control process, after setting the state control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, a waiting process is performed once, and the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started. After that, the instruction setting process is performed to start the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display. However, after the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started in the exit control process, the subsequent process is determined in advance. It is also possible to perform a delay process for intentionally delaying over a predetermined period, and to perform an instruction setting process after the predetermined period has elapsed to start navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the sub-control unit 91 to perform AT confirmation notification for notifying that it is determined to be controlled to the AT state within a predetermined period during which delay processing is performed. After the AT confirmation notification is performed, the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform an instruction setting process after starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a and control to start the navigation notification in the exit control process. A configuration in which an instruction setting process is performed in the reel control process after the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on in the ball control process, and the navigation notification is started when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started. But it ’s okay. In such a configuration, at the start of the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started, and then a predetermined period of weight, that is, a predetermined period from the start of the previous game has elapsed. When this is done, navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 is started. If a predetermined period of weight has elapsed at the start of the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are substantially simultaneously with the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. As the rotation starts, the navigation notification navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12 is started.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform control so as to start navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 after starting lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a in the ball control process. Although the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on at the start of the game in which the notification start condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 performs navigation on the game auxiliary display 12 in the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. At a predetermined timing (for example, when the third stop operation is finished, when the payout of medals is finished, when the grant of replay is finished, etc.) after the notification is started and until the game is finished, The configuration may be such that lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is started.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to perform AT confirmation notification when the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on on the main control unit 41 side. In the game in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts to be lit on the 41 side, the AT confirmation notification may be performed at a timing before the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts to be lit on the main control unit 41 side. . In addition, the sub-control unit 91 has confirmed that the advantageous section notification is started after the winning of the AT lottery after the transition to the advantageous section based on the command received from the main control section 41. Even in the configuration in which the AT confirmation notification is performed at any timing within the period from when the main control unit 41 is identified until the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, that is, before the AT state is started. good.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the game at which the navigation notification is started, but after determining to shift to the AT state, the navigation notification is performed. Alternatively, the advantageous section notification LED 12a may be turned on before the game is started. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 may also be configured to perform AT confirmation notification at a timing when the main control unit 41 starts to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a after it is determined to shift to the AT state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start navigation notification on the game auxiliary indicator 12 after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. In the control process, after setting the status control data (lighting) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the process for setting the instruction is performed until the timer interrupt process is performed after the interrupt interrupt process is not performed. When the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), the navigation notification data for navigation notification can be set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. In addition, the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the display of the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12 may be started simultaneously. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section is controlled by starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section.

[Transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator at the end of the advantageous section]
The transition of the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12, the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the insertion request LED 17, the replaying LED 20, and the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16 at the end of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When a game section is controlled to an advantageous section, a small role is won by an internal lottery, and a transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed. In the case of stopping, the timing when the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), after a game is started in an advantageous section and a small role is won in an internal lottery, reel control processing is performed, and when at least one reel is controlled to rotate, The auxiliary indicator 12 (except for the eighth segment of the right indicator 12R), the input request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. When the re-gamer wins and the re-game is awarded in the previous game, the replaying LED 20 is controlled to be lit for the period from the end of the previous game to the end of the game (not shown). ).

  Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended (the press of the stop switch is released) and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all the reels, the AT state Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the gaming section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

  After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the combination of small symbols is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and control is performed so as to pay out a predetermined number (for example, nine) of medals when the small role winning is generated. The number of medals paid out is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereby, the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is sequentially updated so as to be counted up to the final value indicating the predetermined number corresponding to the winning small combination. Until the final value of the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, a waiting time when paying out medals to credit or a predetermined time when paying out a predetermined number of medals from the hopper unit is displayed. It will be necessary.

  Then, when the payout of a predetermined number of medals according to the winning small combination is completed, the medal payout process is completed, and the process for setting the state control data in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is performed in the main process. Is called. In this process, based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag has been cleared in the AT state management process described above, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Is performed, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

  Thereafter, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

  Then, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is a vacancy in the number of bets or credits, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to take in the medal. Is set to the ON state, the input request LED 17 is set to ON. Thereafter, when the timer interrupt process is performed, lighting of the input request LED 17 is started. In the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process.

  As described above, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small combination is won by the internal lottery and the advantageous combination is shifted to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small combination is the reel 2L, In the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, after the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C and 2R is stopped, the reel control processing is finished. The final value of the number of medals to be paid out by the medal payout process with the winning of the predetermined small role is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the state control data (off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process. Is set, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Thereby, the fact that the advantageous section has ended is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Further, the turn-on request LED 17 starts to be turned on after the game start waiting process.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small combination is won in the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the symbol combination of the small combination is reels 2L, 2C, In the case of stopping at 2R, the reel control process is ended when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is ended and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. By the processing, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process of the game start waiting process performed thereafter. That is, after the reel is stopped in the game, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended in the period from when the settlement operation is accepted.

  Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won in the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small role is the reel 2L, In the case of stopping at 2C and 2R, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), after the game is started in the advantageous section and the small role is won in the internal lottery, the reel control processing is performed, and when at least one reel is controlled to rotate, The auxiliary display 12 (except for the eighth segment of the right display 12R), the input request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

  Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended (the press of the stop switch is released) and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all the reels, the AT state Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the gaming section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

  After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, the small part won in the internal lottery is missed, and a prize accompanying the payout of medals does not occur, so that the medal payout control and the control of updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 are not performed. Is finished. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is maintained in the extinguished state.

  Then, after the medal payout process is completed, based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag has been cleared by the AT state management process in the main process, the state control data (turned off) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. The advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off by setting the timer interruption process after that.

  Thereafter, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

  Then, in the game start waiting process, the medal care permission setting process in the game start waiting process sets the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the ON state so that the medals are taken in on condition that there is a vacant number or credit. After that, the input request LED 17 is set to ON, and lighting of the input request LED 17 is started. In the game start waiting process, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process.

  In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won in the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the missing symbol combination of the small role is the reel 2L. In the case of stopping at 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished, and the reel control processing is finished by stopping the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. After that, the control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is not performed by the medal payout process, and the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification is performed. The LED 12a is turned off. Thereby, the fact that the advantageous section has ended is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Thereafter, lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started from the game start waiting process.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won by the internal lottery and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the combination of symbols for the small role is reels 2L, 2C. In the case of stopping at 2R, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is finished and the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the reel control processing is finished, and then By the main process, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Then, the acceptance of the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is validated by the operation input acceptance process of the game start waiting process performed thereafter. That is, after the reel is stopped in the game, the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended in the period from when the settlement operation is accepted.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won in the internal lottery, and the advantageous section is shifted to the normal section, and the combination of symbols for which the small role is lost is reels 2L, 2C. In the case of stopping at 2R, after the reel control process is finished, the main section of the advantageous section notification LED 12a outputs the control without updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 by the medal payout process. The state control data (light-off) is set in the buffer, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. On the other hand, as described above, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, the small role is won in the internal lottery, and the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is performed, and the combination of missing symbols of the small section is selected. Is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, after the reel control process is finished, the final value of the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the small role is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the medal payout process. Thereafter, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. That is, the timing when the advantageous section notification LED 12a is extinguished between when the small combination missing symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and when the small combination symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Different.

  Even if the small combination missing symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, or when the small combination symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the main processing causes the advantageous section notification LED 12a to output the buffer. By setting the state control data (off), the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off, and the processing timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is common. However, when the combination of symbols for missing a small part is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, after the reel control process is finished, the main control display unit 12 is not controlled to display the number of medals to be paid out. When the process sets the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, but the combination of small symbols stops on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel control process is terminated, Further, after the control for displaying the number of medals paid out on the auxiliary game indicator 12 is performed, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main processing. The time interval from the end of the reel control process until the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off is different, and the advantageous section notification LED 1 Temporal timing a is turned off it is different.

  Next, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when a lottery target combination including, for example, re-game players A and B is elected as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and transition from the advantageous section to the normal section Based on FIG. 22, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a informs that the advantageous section has ended when the symbol combination of the re-combining player A or the re-gaming combination B stops on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. explain. Note that the replaying combinations A and B are replaying combinations having different combinations of symbols constituting the combination for at least one reel. Further, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the first operation order, the configuration pattern of the re-gamer A is preferentially stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped. By operating in the second operation order other than the first operation mode, the reel stop control is performed so that the configuration symbol of the re-gamer B is preferentially stopped by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the game is started in the advantageous section, and after the lottery target combination including the re-game players A and B is won in the internal lottery, the reel control process is performed. When the reel control process is performed and at least one reel is controlled to rotate, the game auxiliary indicator 12 (except the eighth segment of the right indicator 12R), the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, and the waiting state The LED 19 and the replaying LED 20 are controlled to be turned off. On the other hand, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit.

  Then, after the stop switch pressing operation related to the third stop operation is ended (the press of the stop switch is released) and the reel control processing is ended by stopping the rotation of all the reels, the AT state Management processing is performed. In the AT state management process, the advantageous section data initialization process is executed on the condition that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated, and the gaming section is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. Also, the advantageous section notification flag is cleared.

  After performing the AT state management process, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, when the symbol combination of the re-gamer A or the symbol combination of the re-gamer B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, control for paying out medals and control for updating the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 Is terminated without performing. At this time, the display mode of the game auxiliary indicator 12 is maintained in the extinguished state.

  Then, after the medal payout process is completed, a re-game operation process is performed, a predetermined value is set in the re-game medal counter, the replaying LED 20 is set to ON, and the replaying LED 20 is lit. Is started.

  Thereafter, in the main process, based on the fact that the advantageous section notification flag is cleared by the AT state management process, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, and then the timer interrupt processing is performed. By doing so, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off.

  Thereafter, the game end setting process is performed, so that the main process for the game is completed, and then the game start waiting process for the next game is performed.

  Based on the fact that the re-game medal counter is set to 1 or more in the game start waiting process, the bet number up to the specified number is set one by one, and 1-3 BETLEDs 14-16 are sequentially set to the ON state. Thus, the lighting of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is started sequentially. Thereafter, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process, it is determined that there is an empty bet number or credit, and the medal care permission flag is set, so that the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set so as to take in the medal. Is set to the ON state, the input request LED 17 is set to ON. Thereafter, when the timer interrupt process is performed, lighting of the input request LED 17 is started.

  In this way, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the lottery target combination including the re-game players A and B as the winning combination in the internal lottery wins and the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section, When the symbol combination of the re-gamer A or the symbol combination of the re-gamer B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop operation is terminated, and all the reels 2L, 2C After the reel control process is terminated by stopping the rotation of 2R, the replay operation process is performed, and the LED 20 during replaying starts to be turned on, and then the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process Is set to state control data (turned off), and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. Thereby, the fact that the advantageous section has ended is notified by the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Furthermore, after the lighting of the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 is started sequentially from the game start waiting process, the lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started.

  In addition, when the game section is controlled to the advantageous section, when the lottery target combination including the re-game players A and B is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery, and the transition is made from the advantageous section to the normal section, When the symbol combination of the combination A or the combination of the re-playing combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, after the reel control process is finished, the LED 20 is started to be lit during the re-game operation process. Thereafter, the state control data (turned off) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the main process, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off. In other words, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off both when the symbol combination of the replaying combination A is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R and when the combination of the replaying combination B is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Timing is common.

[Control status related to AT]
A control state related to AT controlled by the main control unit 41 (departing state) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the main control unit 41 can control the non-AT state and the AT state as the control state related to the AT. Regardless of whether the aforementioned gaming state is controlled to the non-internal, internal, or special state (BB general, RB), the non-AT state only applies when the above-mentioned gaming interval is controlled to the normal interval. Control. Further, even when the gaming state is non-internal, the special state (BB general, RB) is controlled, and the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, the non-AT state is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled inside and the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section, control is made to either the non-AT state or the AT state.

  In addition, the AT state includes a non-hold state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a normal AT state) in which hold control described later is not performed by the main control unit 41, and a hold state in which hold control is performed. Includes a first hold state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a false precursor state) in which hold control is performed and addition control described later is not performed, hold control is performed, and addition control can be performed. A second hold state (hereinafter may be referred to as a precursor state and an added state) is included. The main control unit 41 controls to shift to the corresponding control state when a transition condition described later is satisfied in the control state regarding each AT.

  The main control unit 41 performs the AT lottery role in the internal lottery (in this embodiment, the push order is small) on the condition that the game zone is controlled to the advantageous zone and the game state is controlled inside. When a combination 1 to 6, a specific small combination 1, a specific small combination 2, or a replaying combination is won, navigation notification is executed in the AT state whether or not to control the AT state. It is possible to perform an AT lottery to determine the number of times, that is, the number of games (hereinafter referred to as the number of navigation games), and a predetermined number of navigation games are given by winning the AT lottery, and the state shifts to the AT state. To control.

  In the AT lottery, when the AT lottery is performed in response to the winning of the specified small role 1 and the specified small role 2 that have a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than the other internal lottery target roles The decision to control to the AT state is made at a higher rate than when the other internal lottery object combination is won. As a result, when the symbol combination of specific small combination 1 and specific small combination 2 is stopped on reels 2L, 2C, 2R as a result of the game, it is compared with the case where other symbol combinations are stopped on reels 2L, 2C, 2R. This suggests the possibility of winning the AT lottery at a high rate.

  Further, in the AT lottery, when the AT lottery is performed with the winning of the specified small role 2 having a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than the specific small role 1 among the AT lottery target roles, the winning of the specific small role 1 is performed. The decision to control to the AT state is made at a higher rate compared to the case where it is performed as a trigger. Thus, when the symbol combination of the specific small role 2 is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as a result of the game, it is higher than when the symbol combination of the specific small role 1 is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The possibility of winning the AT lottery in proportion is suggested.

  The main control unit 41, on the condition that the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, wins the added state lottery target combination (specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2 in this embodiment) in the internal lottery. It is possible to carry out an extra state lottery that determines whether or not to control to an extra state (second hold state) in which the number of navigation games can be added, and by winning the extra state lottery, the extra state Transition control to shift to.

  In the added state lottery, when the added state lottery is performed with the winning of the specified small role 2 having a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than the specified small role 1 among the added state lottery target roles, The decision to control the added state is made at a higher rate compared to the case where the winning is performed. Thus, when the symbol combination of the specific small role 2 is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R as a result of the game, it is higher than when the symbol combination of the specific small role 1 is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The possibility of winning the extra lottery in proportion is suggested.

  When the control state related to the AT is controlled to the added state, the main control unit 41 is subject to an additional lottery target in the internal lottery (in this embodiment, push order small combinations 1 to 6) is won. It is possible to perform an extra lottery to determine whether or not to add an extra number of navigation games and the number of navigation games in the case of adding an extra, and by winning the extra lottery, an extra number of navigation games is added Addition control is performed.

  In the extra lottery, a lottery is performed using a lottery table corresponding to the extra state lottery role that triggered the extra state lottery to be shifted to the second hold state, and the number of additional navigation games is determined. When the added state lottery target that triggered the added state lottery is the specified small role 1, the lottery table A is used, and the added state lottery target role that triggered the added state lottery is the specified small role 2. In some cases, the lottery table B is used. In the lottery table B, compared to the lottery table A, the average value of the number of navigation games determined to be added is set higher. For example, when lottery table A is used, it is determined that 20 games are added on average, and when lottery table B is used, it is determined that 40 games are added on average. Yes.

  In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a navigation game number counter for counting the remaining number of navigation games given by the AT lottery and the extra lottery is set. The main control unit 41 initializes the navigation game number counter when the AT state is ended, that is, when the non-AT state is started. Then, when the number of navigation games is awarded by winning the AT lottery and the extra lottery, an addition process of adding the number of given navigation games to the navigation game number counter is performed. The number of remaining navigation games is counted by performing a subtraction process so that the value of the navigation game number counter is decremented by 1 each time the winning combination is won.

  Also, an AT game number counter for counting the number of AT games controlled continuously in the AT state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When starting the AT state, the main control unit 41 initializes the value of the AT game number counter to zero. Then, every time a game is played in the AT state, the number of AT games is counted by controlling so that the value of the AT game number counter is incremented by one.

  In addition, a hold game number counter for counting the remaining number of hold games for which hold control is performed is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The main control unit 41 sets a predetermined number corresponding to the result of the lottery in the hold game number counter when the added state lottery is performed, and if the lottery is not won, When a predetermined game number (5 games in this embodiment) is set in the hold game number counter and the lottery is won, the second predetermined game number (15 games in this embodiment) is set as the hold game number counter. Set to. The remaining number of held games is counted by controlling so that the value of the held game number counter is decremented by 1 for each game in the hold state.

  The main control unit 41 performs control so that the subtraction process for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter is not performed even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in each game in the hold state. It is possible to perform hold control that does not update the value of the game number counter so as to approach the value that is the end condition of the AT state. The main control unit 41 performs hold control in the hold state, so that the value of the navigation game number counter at the end of the hold state is compared with the value at the start of the hold state, It is possible to prevent the update from approaching a certain value.

  Note that the hold state is controlled so that the value of the navigation game number counter at the end of the hold state is not updated so as to approach the value that is the end condition of the AT state as compared to the value at the start of the state. Any one may be used, and may be controlled over a plurality of games, or may be controlled only in one game.

  The hold control according to the present embodiment is configured not to perform the subtraction control for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter in the hold state. However, the hold control sets the value of the navigation game number counter in the AT state. As long as the control is performed so as not to be updated so as to approach the end condition value, as the hold control, the control for adding the number of navigation games corresponding to the period for controlling to the hold state to the navigation game number counter is being held. (For example, at the start or end of the hold state). In the hold state, the subtraction control of the navigation game number counter may be performed when the navigation target role is won. Even in such a configuration, the value of the navigation game number counter at the end of the hold state should not be updated so as to approach the value that is the end condition of the AT state as compared with the value at the start of the state. Can do.

  When the main control unit 41 is controlling to the AT state, the advantageous section game number has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment), or the medal net increase in the advantageous section is the second predetermined number. On the condition that the value (in this embodiment, 2088) has been exceeded, a predetermined number of navigation games (in this embodiment, about 100 games (about 200 games for AT games and about 600 cards for net increase in medals) )) Is added specially and added to the number of navigation games, and the AT state can be continued until the end condition (end condition 1 or end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section ends. At the same time, by performing the ending control for ending the AT state, the ending state (a state in which the AT state is continuously controlled until either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied) It is possible to control the.

  In the ending state of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls to the AT state based on the value of the navigation game number counter. The number of navigation games more than the number required for the AT state to continue until the time is established is set in the navigation game number counter, and the state is continuously controlled to the AT state until the end of the advantageous section is established It is. On the other hand, the ending state may be a state in which the AT state is continuously controlled until either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is satisfied, regardless of the remaining number of navigation games. When the control unit 41 is controlling to the AT state, the control unit 41, on condition that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value or that the net number of medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the second predetermined value, After the condition is satisfied, the control may be continued to the AT state regardless of the remaining number of navigation games until the end of the advantageous section is satisfied.

  In a predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, a special grant flag that can specify whether or not a special number of navigation games has been given by ending control is set. The special grant flag is updated so that the special grant can be specified when special grant is performed by ending control, while being initialized at the end of the advantageous section, It is updated so that it can be specified that no special grant has been made.

  Next, a non-AT state and an AT state (non-hold state, first hold state, second hold state) which are control states relating to AT will be described.

  The non-AT state is a state in which the AT is not controlled and the navigation notification is not performed. In the non-AT state, regardless of whether the game section is controlled as a normal section or an advantageous section, the navigation notification by the main control unit 41 is not performed even if the winning combination is won in the internal lottery. By not performing the navigation notification, the medal payout rate does not exceed 100% in the non-AT state.

  Further, in the non-AT state, the AT lottery target role (in this embodiment, in the order of pushing) is determined on the condition that the game section is controlled to the advantageous section and the game state is controlled inside. When a small combination 1-6, a specific small combination 1, a specific small combination 2, a replaying combination) is won, an AT lottery is performed. In the non-AT state, when the AT lottery is won, the game is ended at the end of the game won in the AT lottery, and the game is shifted to the AT state. Is added to the navigation game number counter.

  In the non-AT state, when the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section and the gaming state is not controlled to be inside, that is, the gaming section is controlled to the advantageous section. When the state is controlled during non-internal, or when the game section is controlled to the normal section and the game state is controlled to either non-internal or internal, the internal lottery Even if the AT lottery winning combination is won, the AT lottery is not performed and the decision to control to the AT state is not made. As a result, when the control is performed in the normal section or when the control is performed in the non-internal state, the shift to the AT state is not performed, and the navigation notification is not performed, so that the medal payout rate is 100. % Is not exceeded.

  The AT state is a state in which navigation notification is performed when the AT is controlled and a predetermined notification condition (a winning combination is won by an internal lottery) is established. In the AT state, navigation notification is performed in each game in which the winning role is won in the internal lottery, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification. Among the winning combinations included in the push order small combinations, it is possible to win an increasing combination in which medals increase. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification during the AT state, the medal payout rate in the AT state exceeds a predetermined payout rate (for example, about 200%). ˜260% (a net increase of 3 to 5 cards per game).

  Further, in the AT state, after the above-described gaming section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification control is performed and the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts to be turned on in the game in which the navigation notification is performed first. The And the said advantageous area alerting | reporting LED12a is continuously controlled to a lighting state until the advantageous area is complete | finished.

  The non-hold state (normal AT state) included in the AT state is a state that is first controlled when the non-AT state is shifted to the AT state. In the non-hold state, when the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combinations 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, the number of assigned navigation games is consumed and navigation notification is performed. Controlled. Specifically, in each game, it is determined whether or not the navigation target combination has been won by internal lottery. When the navigation target combination has been selected, navigation notification control is performed and a navigation game number counter is provided. Subtraction control is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the navigation game number counter has become 0. If it is not determined that the value of the counter has become 0, control is performed to maintain the AT state (non-hold state). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the counter has become 0, at the end of the game in which the value of the counter has become 0, the AT state (non-hold state) is terminated and the state is shifted to the non-AT state. The next game is controlled to the non-AT state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the AT state (non-hold state) and shift to the non-AT state when the value of the navigation game number counter becomes zero. In such a configuration, at the end of the game in which the value of the navigation game number counter is 0, the control is performed so that the advantageous section is also ended when the AT state (non-hold state) is ended, that is, the AT state end timing. May be configured so that the end timings of the advantageous sections coincide with each other, or a predetermined end condition (for example, a specific symbol combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R) after the game in which the value of the navigation game counter is 0 is ended. That a certain number of games are played, that a specific combination is won in an internal lottery, that a specific combination wins or wins a predetermined number of times) Configured to control so as to completion, ie, even better a configuration in which the end timing of the end timing and advantageous interval AT state may not match. In a configuration in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the game in which the value of the navigation game number counter is 0 is satisfied, and the advantageous section is also controlled to end, the predetermined condition is satisfied until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. (E.g., winning a predetermined role, winning an AT lottery when the predetermined role is won) Later, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the AT state will be controlled again. In addition, after the game in which the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0, a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and thereby an advantageous section is controlled to end, and the predetermined end condition is satisfied until the predetermined end condition is satisfied. In a configuration in which the condition can be established and the AT state can be controlled again, the sub-control unit 91 produces an effect on the liquid crystal display 51 using a predetermined background image displayed in the AT state even after the end of the AT state. By performing the above, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation to be controlled to the AT state even in a game after the value of the navigation game number counter becomes 0.

  Further, in the non-hold state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the added state when the added state lottery target combination (specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2 in this embodiment) is won in the internal lottery. Addition state lottery is performed. If it is not determined in the added state lottery and it is not determined to shift to the added state, the non-hold state is temporarily interrupted at the end of the game in which the added state lottery is performed. A transition is made to the 1 hold state, and the next game is controlled to the first hold state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning state is won and the transition to the additional state is determined, the non-hold state is temporarily interrupted at the end of the game in which the additional state lottery is performed, and the second hold is held. The state is shifted to the second hold state from the next game. In the first hold state and the second hold state, the hold control is performed so that the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is not performed, and whether or not the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. Regardless, the value of the navigation game number counter is not updated so as to approach the value (0 in the present embodiment) that is the end condition of the AT state.

  The first hold state (false precursor state) included in the AT state is a state in which hold control is performed by the main control unit 41 and addition control described later is not performed, and the first predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, 5 games). In the first hold state, hold control is performed, so that when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification is performed, but the subtraction processing of the navigation game number counter is not performed. Further, the addition control of the navigation game number counter is not performed because the addition control in which the extra lottery is performed is not performed. Therefore, in the period from the start to the end of the first hold state, the value of the navigation game number counter is maintained without being increased or decreased.

  In the first hold state, the hold game number counter is decremented by 1 in each game, and at the end of the game in which the value of the hold game number counter is 0, the first hold state is ended and the non-hold state. And the next game is controlled to the non-hold state. By being controlled to the non-hold state, the navigation game number counter is subtracted when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed.

  The second hold state (the precursor state and the added state) included in the AT state is a state in which hold control is performed by the main control unit 41 and the additional control of the number of navigation games can be performed, and the second predetermined number of games ( In this embodiment, control is performed over 15 games).

  The second hold state is composed of a precursor state and an added state, and is first controlled to the precursor state when transitioning from the non-hold state to the second hold state. In each game in the precursor state, the hold game number counter is decremented by one, and when the value of the hold game number counter reaches a predetermined value (10 in this embodiment), that is, the transition to the second hold state is made. When the first predetermined number of games has elapsed after that, the transition is made from the precursor state to the added state, and the next game is controlled to the added state. Also, in each game in the added state, the hold game number counter is decremented by 1, and the second predetermined number of games is reached at the end of the game when the value of the hold game number counter becomes 0, that is, after the transition to the second hold state. When the time elapses, the second hold state (additional state) is terminated, transitioned to the non-hold state, and the next game is controlled to the non-hold state. By being controlled to the non-hold state, the navigation game number counter is subtracted when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is performed.

  In the second hold state, whether or not it is controlled to the precursor state or the added state, the hold control is performed by the main control unit 41 in the same manner as in the first hold state. When the navigation target combination is won by lottery, navigation notification is performed, but the subtraction processing of the navigation game number counter is not performed. Further, when the second hold state is controlled to the sign state, the addition control of the navigation game number counter is not performed because the addition control in which the extra lottery is performed is not performed. Therefore, the value of the navigation game number counter is maintained without being increased or decreased during the period from the start to the end of the precursor state in the second hold state.

  Further, in the second hold state, when the sign state is controlled, the additional control of the number of navigation games is not performed, but when the controlled state is controlled, the additional control of the number of navigation games can be performed. In the added state, when the additional lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the push order small combination 1 to 6 which is the navigation target combination) is won in the internal lottery, the additional number of navigation games (0 at the time of non-winning is set) In addition, a lottery is performed. Then, the number of navigation games awarded by the extra lottery is added to the navigation game number counter, and the number of navigation games is added. Therefore, during the period from the start to the end of the added state in the second hold state, the value of the navigation game number counter is sometimes increased or increased. Sometimes.

  Thus, in the second hold state, the hold control is performed in the precursor state and the added state, so that the number of navigation games in the period from the start to the end of the second hold state is the same as in the first hold state. Although the value of the counter is not decreased, the value of the navigation game number counter can be maintained or increased without any increase or decrease by performing the additional lottery in the added state and performing the additional control of the number of navigation games. May be.

  Further, in the second hold state, the predetermined internal lottery object combination (push order 1 to 6 which is the navigation object combination) that triggers the navigation notification and the subtraction process in the non-hold state is navigated by the internal lottery. The navigation notification is performed by winning the target combination and the additional lottery target role, but the subtraction process of the navigation game number counter is not performed, and the addition process of the navigation game number counter is performed by winning the additional lottery. Done.

  In the AT state, the main control unit 41 controls the ending state by performing ending control when a predetermined condition is established based on the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in number of medals in the advantageous section as described above.

  Specifically, in each game in the AT state, the main control unit 41 refers to the advantageous interval game number counter in the RAM 41c at the start of the game, and the current advantageous interval game number is a first predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1400 games). Then, when the number of advantageous section games is the first predetermined value, that is, when it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value in the game, the special grant flag is referred to The number of navigation games is controlled so as to be given specially on the condition that the fact that it has not been performed is specified (in this embodiment, 100 games (about 200 games for AT games, the net increase in medals) For about 600 cards))) and added to the navigation game number counter so that the AT state is continued until the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games at which advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied. The number of navigation games is added to and the ending state is controlled. In addition, when the special grant is performed, the special grant flag is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has been performed.

  Further, in each game in the AT state, the main control unit 41 refers to the net increase counter in the RAM 41c at the end of the game, and the net increase in medals in the current advantageous section is a second predetermined value (in this example, 2088). ) Is exceeded. Then, when the net medal increase number exceeds the second predetermined value, the special grant flag is referred to and control is performed so that the special grant is performed on the condition that the special grant is not specified. It is advantageous to add a predetermined number of navigation games (in this embodiment, 100 games (about 200 games for AT games and about 600 games for net increase in medals)) to the navigation game number counter. The number of navigation games is increased so that the AT state is continued until the specified number of medals is set to the predetermined number of medals for which the section end condition 2 is satisfied, and the ending state is controlled. In addition, when the special grant is performed, the special grant flag is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant has been performed.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 determines that the number of advantageous section games is not the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment) in each game in the AT state, the net medal increase number in the advantageous section is the second predetermined number. When it is determined that the value (in this embodiment, 2088 sheets) has not been exceeded, the special grant flag is referred to, and if it is specified that special grant has been performed, control is performed so that ending control is not performed. . Maintain the contents of the special grant flag without updating it.

  Further, the main control unit 41 initializes the special grant flag by the advantageous zone data initialization process at the end of the advantageous zone, and is updated so that it can be specified that the special grant is not performed.

  As described above, in the ending control, in the AT state, the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (this implementation). In the example, the number of navigation games is more than the difference game number from the current advantageous section game number to the upper limit game number by giving a special number of navigation games on the condition that it exceeds 2088). After that, or by adding the number of navigation games that can obtain a net increase of more than the difference from the current medal net increase to the specified number to the navigation game number counter, the end condition of the advantageous section Control is performed so that the AT state is continued until (end condition 1 or end condition 2) is satisfied, that is, until the advantageous section is ended. It has become the jar.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 can control a plurality of types of states including the non-AT state and the AT state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state as the control state related to the AT. It is possible to control the number of navigation games (in the AT state) given by the lottery and the extra lottery to the AT state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to control to the AT state for a period from when the number of navigation games is given until the remaining number of navigation games becomes zero, that is, navigation notification is executed. The period for controlling to the AT state is managed based on the number of times that the AT state is controlled. The AT game number is controlled to be decremented by 1, and the AT state is controlled for the period from when the AT game number is given until the remaining number of AT games reaches 0, that is, controlled to the AT state. Configuration for managing a period for controlling to the AT state based on the number of games played, the number of medals to be paid out in the AT state by the AT lottery and the extra lottery (total payout number or Each time a medal is paid out or a bet amount is set in a game in the AT state, the AT state is set according to the number of payouts and the number of bets in the game. A configuration in which the remaining number of medals to be paid out is controlled to be updated, and the AT state is controlled over a period from when the number of medals to be paid out in the AT state is given until the remaining number becomes the end condition, A configuration may be adopted in which a period for controlling to the AT state is managed based on the number of medals to be paid out in the AT state (total payout number or total net increase number).

  In addition, the main control unit 41 can notify the correct pressing order when the pressing order small combination in which the operation mode (correct pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in which medals increase in the internal lottery is won is won. Navigation notification can be executed, and in the navigation notification control, the correct push order can be notified in the AT state, and in the AT state, the correct push order is notified by the navigation notification more frequently than in the non-AT state. This configuration is more advantageous to the player than the non-AT state.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 can control to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, and can perform a subtraction process to reduce the remaining number of navigation games by winning the navigation target role in the internal lottery in the AT state. It is. Further, in the AT state, when the remaining number of navigation games becomes 0, the AT state is terminated and the state is shifted to the non-AT state.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. A hold state and a second hold state are included.

  Moreover, the main control part 41 can be controlled to the 1st hold state and the 2nd hold state as a hold state, and the 1st hold state is a case where a navigation object part wins by internal lottery and performs a navigation alert | report. By controlling so as not to perform a subtraction process of subtracting 1 from the navigation game number counter that counts the remaining number of navigation games, the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease, and even if the additional lottery role is won The remaining number of navigation games is not increased by controlling not to perform the extra lottery. Further, in the second hold state, when the navigation target role is elected in the internal lottery and performs the navigation notification, the subtraction process of subtracting 1 from the navigation game number counter that counts the remaining number of navigation games is not performed. If the number of navigation games is not reduced and the additional lottery role is won, the additional lottery is performed, and the number of navigation games won in the additional lottery is added to the navigation game number counter. By performing the addition process, the remaining number of navigation games can be increased.

  Also, the main control unit 41 controls the control state before controlling to the first hold state and the second hold state both after finishing the first hold state and after finishing the second hold state. And control to a non-hold state (normal AT state) in which the control contents are common.

  Further, the main control unit 41 controls to the advantageous section, and can control to the AT state when the remaining number of navigation games is 1 or more, and the advantageous section for counting the number of advantageous section games. An advantageous zone game that is counted by the advantageous zone game number counter even when the remaining number of navigation games is 1 or more, comprising: a game number counter; AT either when the end condition 1 established when the number reaches the upper limit game number or the end condition 2 established when the net increase in medals counted by the net increase counter exceeds the prescribed number is satisfied. Control to end the state.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 counts the number of advantageous section games by adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter every time a game is played, and every time a medal is paid out even in the hold state. Control is performed to add the net medal increase number to the number counter and count the medal net increase number increased in the advantageous section.

  Further, the main control unit 41 controls the second hold state among the first hold state and the second hold state, starts control of the second hold state, and after the first predetermined number of games has elapsed, 2 During the period until the predetermined number of games elapses, the number of navigation games is controlled so that it can be added, and in the internal lottery, the winning lottery is selected, and the additional lottery is performed. The number of navigation games won is added to the navigation game number counter to increase the number of navigation games.

[About AT production]
The AT effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main control unit 41 can transmit various commands that can specify the control status and the like on the main control unit 41 side to the sub-control unit 91 according to the progress status of the game. A command that can identify the progress status of the game, a command that can identify the currently controlled gaming section, a command that can identify the control state related to the currently controlled AT, and a navigation that is notified by the navigation notification when performing navigation notification Games such as a command that can specify a number, a command that can specify whether or not the above-mentioned special number of navigation games has been given, a command that can specify the number of advantageous section games, a command that can specify the net increase in number of medals in an advantageous section, etc. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in accordance with the progress status.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 can perform control based on the command received from the main control unit 41 so as to perform various effects according to the progress status and control state of the specified game. For example, the main control unit 41 side is controlled to perform an AT effect that suggests that it is controlled to the AT state over a period in which the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, and the main control unit 41 side In a game in which navigation notification is performed, control is performed to perform a navigation effect that notifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are notified by the navigation notification.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 determines at least one of the above-described end condition 1 and end condition 2 for the advantageous section controlled on the main control unit 41 side based on the command received from the main control unit 41 side. When it is specified that the establishment of is near, an advance notification (advantageous section end notice) is made over the period until the advantageous section is terminated, informing that the completion condition of the advantageous section is near Control.

  In the AT effect, the AT effect (usually) suggesting that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the AT effect is controlled to be controlled in the AT state on the main control unit 41 side, An AT effect (ending) indicating that the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in an ending state is included.

  The sub-control unit 91 is a case where it is specified that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment). And the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the second predetermined value (in this embodiment, 2088), that is, the ending control has not yet been performed and the navigation stock has been given specially. If not, control is performed so that the AT effect (normal) is performed until a start condition for the later-described AT effect (ending) is satisfied. On the other hand, when it is specified that the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment), or When the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (in this example, 2088), that is, the ending control is performed and the special provision of the navigation stock is performed. After the start condition of the ending is established, control is performed so as to perform the AT effect (ending).

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 controls the navigation effect when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side while performing the AT effect (normal) or the AT effect (ending). The navigation image (see FIG. 7) for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R notified by the navigation notification is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In addition, when the sub control unit 91 is performing the AT effect (normal) and the main control unit 41 specifies that the control is to be performed in the first hold state, the sub control unit 91 performs the first hold effect described later. When it is specified that the second hold state is controlled, control is performed so as to perform a second hold effect described later. Then, control is performed so as to shift to the AT effect (normal) both when the first hold effect ends and when the second hold effect ends.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 determines that it is determined on the main control unit 41 side that the ending state is controlled based on the command received from the main control unit 41 side (for example, the main control unit 41). The number of remaining AT games estimated based on the number of remaining navigation games on the control unit 41 side, that is, the sum of the number of advantageous section games that can be continued in the future and the current number of advantageous section games is the upper limit number of advantageous sections. Or the sum of the net increase in medals that can be acquired in the future estimated based on the remaining number of navigation games and the current net increase in medals is the specified number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section. When it is specified that the number exceeds a certain number), the AT effect (ending) starts in a period of a predetermined number of games before being controlled by the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to perform suggesting ending suggests directing that they will.

  The AT effect (normal) performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the AT effect (normal), the AT effect screen that is displayed when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the AT state is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, thereby controlling the AT effect. It is suggested that it is. The AT effect screen includes a main effect image (predetermined character image) that is a main effect composed of character images and the like, and a remaining navigation game number suggesting image (in this embodiment, a main navigation image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games). A numeric image (for example, 50) indicating the remaining number of navigation games specified based on a command received from the control unit 41 side, a game history during AT (for example, the number of games played in the AT state, AT AT game history images (in this embodiment, the number of games controlled in the AT state (digested during AT) suggesting a net increase in the state, the number of times controlled in the AT state, the number of times controlled in the advantageous section, etc.) A number image indicating the number of games (for example, 500 games), a number image indicating the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (net increase in AT) (for example, 1502), and AT Out background image A displayed in (usually), composed mainly of. Further, in the AT effect screen, similarly to the normal effect screen in the above-described normal effect (not shown), the credit stored in the slot machine 1, the number of medals paid out in the game, and the game are set. An image showing the number of bets is displayed.

  Next, the ending suggestion effect performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Based on the command received from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 is controlled to the AT state on the main control unit 41 side, and it is determined that the control to the ending state is confirmed. In this case, the number of advantageous segment games is a third predetermined value (1395 in this example) before the predetermined number of games (5 games in this example) before the first predetermined value (1400 games in this example). The game is determined to have reached the game), or the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the AT state, and the net number of medals in the advantageous section is a second predetermined value (in this embodiment, 2088) is a net increase in number corresponding to a predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) (in this embodiment, 15 games (5 games being a predetermined number of games × 3 average value of net increase))) Previous fourth predetermined value (book In 施例, at the end of the game, which is specified that exceeds the 2073 sheets), on the condition that the ending suggests production has not yet been carried out, controls so as to start the ending suggests director.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the ending suggestion effect, at the start of a game that is controlled to the AT state and is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value, or in the AT state The liquid crystal display 51 starts displaying the ending suggestion image at the end of the game in which it is controlled and the net increase in medals is specified to exceed the fourth predetermined value. The display of the ending suggestion image is continued until the AT effect (ending) is started.

  In the ending suggestion effect, when the ending suggestion effect is performed when the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value, the remaining number of games until the advantageous section game number reaches the first fixed value is suggested. A number image and a message image that suggests that the AT effect (ending) will start as the remaining number of games progress will be displayed as an ending suggestion image, and the ending suggestion image so that the remaining number of games is counted down each time the game is started Is updated (see FIGS. 25A and 25B). On the other hand, when performing the ending suggestion effect when the medal net increase exceeds the fourth predetermined value, the number image indicating the remaining net increase until the medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value and the remaining A message image suggesting that the AT effect (ending) starts when the net increase is increased by the net increase is displayed as an ending suggestion image, and an ending suggestion image is displayed so as to indicate the remaining net increase at the end of the game. Update (not shown).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), it is specified at the start of a game in which it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, or that the net number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value. At the end of the game to be played, that is, when the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the number of navigation games is specially given, the ending confirmation notification for notifying that it is determined to be controlled in the ending state The ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the ending confirmation notification image, the main control unit 41 is displayed by displaying a predetermined character image and a message image (in this embodiment, a character image of “ENDING GET !!”) indicating that an AT effect (ending) is performed. It is confirmed on the side that the ending state is controlled, and the fact that the AT effect (ending) is confirmed is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 25C, in the state where the ending confirmation notification image is displayed, the bet number for starting the next game is set, and the start switch 7 is operated, so that the game starts. Then, after the ending suggestion effect and the AT effect (normal) are finished, the AT effect (ending) is started, and the ending start image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the ending start image, the AT effect (ending) is displayed by displaying a predetermined character image and a message image indicating that the AT effect (ending) is started (in this embodiment, a character image of “ENDING START!”). ) Will start.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 displays the ending start image for a predetermined period (3 seconds in this embodiment), ends the display of the ending start image, and then ends the advantageous section. Accordingly, control is performed so that the AT effect (ending) is performed until the AT state is terminated.

  Next, the AT effect (ending) performed by the sub control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), on the AT effect screen (ending), the main effect image, the remaining AT game number suggesting image suggesting the number of remaining games controlled in the AT state (advantageous section), the AT game history image, By displaying the AT effect screen composed of the background image D on the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that the AT state is controlled.

  On the AT effect screen (ending), a main effect image (in this embodiment, an image of a predetermined character riding on a rocket) that is not displayed in the AT effect (normal) and the added state effect described later, and a background image A Displays a background image D (image of celestial body D) in a different display mode. The player can recognize that the AT effect screen (ending) is performed by displaying the main effect image and the background image D in a display manner different from the display manner in the AT effect (normal) and the added state effect. is there. Further, by performing the AT effect screen (ending), it is suggested that the ending control is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the special number of navigation games is given, and the number of advantageous section games is the first predetermined number. When the value (1400 games in the present embodiment) is reached, the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is almost satisfied, and the net number of medals in the advantageous section is the second predetermined value (2088 in the present embodiment). Exceeding it indicates that the favorable section end condition 2 is almost established. Further, by performing the AT effect screen (ending), it is suggested that the currently controlled AT state is continued until the end condition (end condition 1, end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied. In addition, the display mode of the AT game history image is the same as the display mode in the above-described AT effect (normal).

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, in the AT effect screen (ending) remaining AT game number suggestion image, the AT effect is triggered by the fact that the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value. When (ending) is started, a numerical image is used to suggest the difference between the upper limit number of advantageous section games and the current number of advantageous section games that will satisfy the end condition 1 as the number of remaining AT games. Is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the AT effect (ending) is started when the net medal increased number exceeds the second predetermined value, a character image that does not show a specific numerical value (for example, an image such as “?”). Is displayed in place of a numeric image suggesting the number of remaining AT games (not shown). When the AT effect screen (ending) is started when the net medal increased number exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games until the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied is uncertain. By not displaying a specific numerical value as a number image suggesting the number of remaining AT games, there is a mismatch between the number of remaining AT games suggested by the number image and the number of remaining AT games that are actually controlled, It is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  Note that in the AT effect screen (ending) remaining AT game number suggestion image, even when the AT effect (ending) is started when the advantageous section game number has reached the first predetermined value, the medal net increase Even when the AT effect (ending) is started when the number exceeds the second predetermined value, the number of games or the estimated number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is also displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of games until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is not displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, on the AT effect screen (ending), an ending state suggestion image (in this embodiment, a character image of “Congratulations!”) Is displayed in the vicinity of the remaining AT game number suggestion image. This indicates that the ending state is controlled, and that the AT state is ended with the remaining predetermined number of games.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), on the AT effect screen (ending), an advantageous section end notice image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a prior notice for notifying that the favorable section end condition is almost established. Thus, an advantageous section end notice is given to notify that the AT state is terminated when the advantageous section termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous section is terminated and before the AT state is terminated.

  The advantageous section end notice image includes a game number image indicating the difference between the current advantageous section game number and the upper limit number of games, and a number indicating the difference between the current advantageous section net increase number and the prescribed number. An image and a character image suggesting that the AT state is ended when the game is played by the number of games of the difference or when the net number of medals is increased by the number of the difference are included. The advantageous section end notice image is displayed in the display area between the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R switch in the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. It becomes easy for a person to recognize.

  In addition, the advantageous section end notice image is controlled to be blinked and displayed alternately switching between a display state and a non-display state at every predetermined time interval. While the player can recognize the difference number of the difference number of games and the net increase in number of medals, while in the non-display state, the image behind the advantageous section end notice image (in this embodiment, the AT game history image) ) Can be recognized.

  Further, in the blinking display control of the advantageous section end notice image, the more the situation where the advantageous section end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is established is relatively close, that is, the difference between the advantageous section game numbers and the net medal increase number. The smaller the number of differences, the farther the favorable section end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is established, that is, the case where the number of advantageous section game differences and the medal net increase are relatively large. Also, the display state and the non-display state of the advantageous section end notice image are switched so that the display state time is long and the non-display state time is short. As a result, the advantageous section end notice image is emphasized and displayed when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are relatively close.

  In the AT effect (ending) of the present embodiment, the character image and the background image different from the AT effect (normal) are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest that the ending state is set. In the production (ending), a configuration that suggests the ending state may be displayed by displaying a moving image or an image peculiar to the ending state, for example, an animation moving image related to content corresponding to the model of the slot machine 1.

  Next, the flow of control related to the game performed by the main control unit 41 in relation to the AT effect and the control related to the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 can control the gaming section to the normal section and the advantageous section while controlling the control state related to the AT to the non-AT state and the AT state. When an advantageous section transition lottery target is elected in the internal lottery, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section by winning in the advantageous section transition lottery. . Then, when controlling to the non-AT state and controlling to the advantageous section, the AT lottery subject wins in the internal lottery, AT lottery, by winning the AT lottery, Thereafter, a predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, the number of games determined by lottery among 3 to 5 games, and the period of AT sign production on the sub-control unit 91 side indicating the possibility of winning the AT lottery ) Is controlled so as to shift to the AT state. Then, the AT state is continuously controlled until the remaining number of assigned navigation games becomes zero or until the end condition (end condition 1, end condition 2) of the advantageous section is satisfied.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs control so as to produce an effect in an effect mode according to the control state related to the AT controlled on the main control unit 41 side, and the non-AT state on the main control unit 41 side. Control is performed so that the above-described normal effect is performed while the AT state is controlled, and the above-described AT effect (normal or ending) is performed. Further, when an AT lottery is performed on the main control unit 41 side, an AT precursor lottery for determining whether or not to perform an AT precursor effect (not shown) indicating the possibility of winning the AT lottery is performed, and the lottery By winning, the AT sign effect is performed over a predetermined number of games (3 to 5 games in this embodiment) determined by lottery on the main control unit 41 side. In the AT sign lottery, when the AT lottery is won on the main control unit 41 side, that is, when it is determined to be controlled to the AT state, the ratio to win the AT sign lottery is set to be high As a result of the AT precursor effect, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of winning the AT lottery.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 28, when the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the main control unit 41 stops the third stop in the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. When the switch operation is completed, that is, at the end of the game, an advantageous section data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section, and to end the AT state and shift to the non-AT state. Let

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled to the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side and controlled to the AT state, the number of advantageous section games is the first at the start of each game. It is determined whether the predetermined value, the third predetermined value, or the upper limit number of games has been reached.

  Then, control is performed so that the AT effect (normal) is performed until the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value. When it is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value in the state where the AT effect (normal) is being performed, the game that is specified that the number of advantageous section games has reached the third predetermined value At the start of the game, the remaining number of navigation games is a predetermined number (a number corresponding to the difference between the third predetermined value of the advantageous section game number and the first predetermined value, and the AT state is continued and the advantageous section game number is The ending suggestion effect is started on the condition that the predetermined number of navigation games can be reached), and the ending suggestion effect is performed while the AT effect (normal) is continuously performed. Then, at the end of the game immediately before the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect, and the AT effect (ending) is performed. Informs that it has been confirmed.

  After that, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value, the ending suggestion effect is ended and the ending start image of the AT effect (ending) is displayed on the liquid crystal Displayed on the display 51, AT effect (ending) is started. Further, when the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value is started, the advance notice of the end of the advantageous section is established as a prior notice for informing the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance, and the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. The notification that it is near is started.

  Thereafter, at the start of a game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section end notice (preliminary notification) is terminated. Then, at the end of the game when the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, a result notification (not shown) for notifying the game result in the advantageous section is performed, and the game history during the AT state (the number of games of AT, Net increase). In the result notification, for example, a character image, a numeric image indicating the net increase in medals in the advantageous section, and a numerical image indicating the number of games controlled to the AT state are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, thereby providing an advantageous section (AT state). The game result at is notified.

  Then, in a state where the result is being notified, the operation of the start switch 7 for starting the next game is performed, so that the result notification is ended and the normal presentation is performed from the start of the next game. To do.

  Note that, when the advantageous section is terminated due to the establishment of the advantageous section ending condition 1, the sub-control unit 91, at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is terminated, for example, when performing the result notification, Favorable section end condition establishment notification (for example, display of a message image of “Advantage section has reached the upper limit (1500 games))” and the ending condition of the advantageous section are satisfied. The advantageous section related information initialization notification that informs that the information about the advantageous section has been initialized as a result (for example, a message image of “initialized information related to navigation notification”) has been completed. And the structure which performs the post-notification which alert | reports the information relevant to the completion | finish of the said advantageous area later may be sufficient. By performing advantageous section related information initialization notification as a post-event notification, even if the advantageous section ends and the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, the player may be dissatisfied or confused. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the post-notification may be configured so that the post-notification is performed only at the end of the game at which the advantageous section is ended, or a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time (for example, three minutes or the settlement switch 10) after the advantageous section ends. For example, a time until the operation is detected, a time until the demonstration effect is started), and a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games). By performing the post-notification for a predetermined period, even when the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it can be surely recognized that the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the main control unit 41 increases the medal net increase when the net medal increase number in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, that is, when the net increase number in the advantageous section reaches the prescribed number + 1 or more. In a game in which the number exceeds the specified number, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is ended, that is, at the end of the game, an advantageous interval data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous interval and return to the normal interval And the AT state is terminated and the non-AT state is entered.

  On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 is controlled in the advantageous section on the main control unit 41 side and controlled to the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is determined at the start of each game. It is determined whether any of the second predetermined value, the fourth predetermined value, or the specified number of sheets has been exceeded.

  Then, the AT effect (normal) is performed until the start of the next game of the game in which the medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, until the start of the next game of the game in which the medal net increase has reached the second predetermined value + 1. To control. When it is specified that the medal net increase exceeds the fourth predetermined value in a state where the AT effect (normal) is being performed, that is, when it is specified that the medal net increase has reached the fourth predetermined value +1, At the end of the game where the medal net increase exceeds the fourth predetermined value, the remaining number of navigation games is a predetermined number (a number corresponding to the difference between the fourth predetermined value of the medal net increase and the second predetermined value). Yes, the ending suggestion effect is started and the AT effect (normal) is continued on condition that the AT state is continued and the number of medals net increase is equal to or more than the second predetermined value). The ending suggestion production is performed while performing.

  Then, at the end of the game in which the net medal increase number exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, the game in which the medal net increase number reaches the second predetermined value + 1, the ending confirmation notification image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the ending suggestion effect. Informing that the AT effect (ending) is confirmed to be performed.

  After that, when the start operation of the next game is performed, that is, at the start of the next game of the game where the medal net increase number exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, the next game of the game where the medal net increase number reaches the second predetermined value + 1. At the start of the ending, the ending suggestion effect is ended, and an ending start image of the AT effect (ending) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to start the AT effect (ending). Also, at the start of the next game of the game in which the net number of medals exceeds the second predetermined value, an advantageous section end notice is started as a prior notice for informing the subsequent end of the advantageous section in advance. Notification that the establishment is near is started.

  Thereafter, when the operation of the stop switch related to the third stop is finished in the game where the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, and the payout of medals is completed, that is, the game in which the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. At the end of, the advantageous section end notice (preliminary notification) is ended. Then, as described above, the game result in the advantageous section is notified at the end of the game in the same manner as when the advantageous section end notice (preliminary notification) is ended when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. As a result notification (for example, an image (not shown) indicating the number of games controlled in the AT state, the net increase in medals acquired in the AT state, etc.) is displayed, and the game history (AT state in the AT state) is displayed. Number of games, net increase).

  Then, in a state where the result is being notified, the operation of the start switch 7 for starting the next game is performed, so that the result notification is ended and the normal presentation is performed from the start of the next game. To do.

  Note that, when the advantageous section is terminated due to the establishment of the advantageous section ending condition 2, the sub-control unit 91, at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is terminated, for example, when performing the result notification, An advantageous section ending condition establishment notification (for example, display of a message image of “the net increase in number of medals exceeds the prescribed number (2388))”, and the end of the advantageous section Advantageous section ends, such as advantageous section related information initialization notification (for example, message image of “initialization of information related to navigation notification”) that informs that information about advantageous section has been initialized because the condition is satisfied It may be configured to perform post-notification to post-notify information related to the fact that it has been done and the end of the advantageous section. By performing advantageous section related information initialization notification as a post-event notification, even if the advantageous section ends and the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over, the player may be dissatisfied or confused. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the post-notification may be configured so that the post-notification is performed only at the end of the game at which the advantageous section is ended, or a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time (for example, three minutes or the settlement switch 10) after the advantageous section ends. For example, a time until the operation is detected, a time until the demonstration effect is started), and a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games). By performing the post-notification for a predetermined period, even when the player misses the initialization notification in the game in which the advantageous section ends, it can be surely recognized that the information regarding the advantageous section is not subsequently taken over.

  As described above, the sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs from the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value until the start of the game in which the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. From the end of the game where the medal net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value, that is, from the end of the game where the medal net increase reaches the second predetermined value +1, the net medal increase is less than the specified number. At the end of the game exceeding, that is, until the end of the game when the net number of medals reaches the specified number +1, it is possible to give an advance notice of the advantageous section as a prior notice, and the number of advantageous section games is set to the upper limit number of games. Before reaching the advantageous section ending condition 1 or before the advantageous section ending condition 2 is established because the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number End establishment of the condition 1 or termination condition 2 is that it is possible to notify that close, it is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous interval is terminated by termination condition 1 or termination condition 2 is satisfied.

[About hold production]
The hold effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As described above, the main control unit 41, on the condition that the control state related to the AT is controlled to the AT state, is an additional state lottery target in the internal lottery (in this embodiment, the specified small combination 1, the specific small combination) When the winning combination 2) is won, an additional state lottery is performed, and in accordance with the lottery result of the additional state lottery, a predetermined period (5 games or 15 games) are controlled to the first hold state or the second hold state. Further, when the internal lottery is performed, a command capable of specifying the lottery result of the internal lottery is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, when the added state lottery is performed, a command that can specify the lottery result of the added state lottery is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Further, based on the hold game number counter, when the control of the first hold state or the second hold state is started, when the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) elapses, and the second predetermined number When the number of games (15 games in this embodiment) elapses, a command capable of specifying that the corresponding predetermined number of games has elapsed is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the added state lottery has been performed based on the command received from the main control unit 41, that is, the main control unit 41 side is in the hold state (first When it is specified that control is performed in the hold state and the second hold state), control is performed so as to perform a hold effect that suggests that the control is performed in the hold state.

  In the control of the hold effect, the sub-control unit 91 first sets the effect mode of the hold effect as a strong hold effect to be described later based on the lottery result of the added state lottery specified by the command received from the main control unit 41. Or an effect mode lottery that determines whether to make a weak hold effect, which will be described later. In the production mode lottery, when it is determined that the control state is determined to be controlled in the second hold state on the main control unit 41 side, it is won in the additional state lottery. The effect of the hold effect is set to the strong hold effect at a higher rate than when it is specified that the main control unit 41 is determined to be controlled to the first hold state. The decision to do so is made. Thereby, when the hold effect is performed in the effect mode of the strong hold effect, compared with the effect mode of the weak hold effect, the main control unit 41 is controlled to the second hold state. It is suggested that there is a high possibility.

  In the weak hold effect, as shown in FIG. 30A, at the start of the game for performing the hold effect (in the present embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated), first, it is suggested that the weak hold effect. The weak hold image (in this embodiment, the character image of “HOLD” and the white background frame image) is displayed relatively large in the central portion of the liquid crystal display 51. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30B, the AT effect (normal) while reducing the size of the weak hold image until the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective in the game. The remaining navigation game number is moved in the direction of the suggested image. Then, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), until the reel stop operation in the game becomes effective, the weak hold image is the front side (player side) of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, and the remaining By positioning at least a part of the navigation game number suggestion image at a specific position where it can be invisible from the player side and displaying the weak hold image on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, the remaining navigation is displayed. Decrease the visibility of the game number suggestion image.

  Thereafter, the weak hold image is positioned at a specific position for a predetermined period (5 games or 15 games in the present embodiment) until the end of the hold effect, and the weak hold image is located on the front side of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. Control is performed so as to reduce the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image over a predetermined period during the hold effect while maintaining the state of being superimposed and displayed.

  In the strong hold effect, as shown in FIG. 31A, at the start of the game for performing the hold effect (in the present embodiment, when the start switch 7 is operated), first, it is suggested that the strong hold effect. A strong hold image (in this embodiment, a character image of “HOLD” and a black background frame image) is displayed relatively large in the central portion of the liquid crystal display 51. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31B, while the reel stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective in the game, the AT effect (normal) is performed while reducing the size of the strong hold image. The remaining navigation game number is moved in the direction of the suggested image. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), until the reel stop operation in the game becomes valid, the strong hold image is the front side (player side) of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, and the remaining By positioning at least a part of the navigation game number suggestion image at a specific position where it can be invisible from the player side and displaying the strong hold image on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, Decrease the visibility of the game number suggestion image.

  Thereafter, the strong hold image is positioned at a specific position for a predetermined period (5 games or 15 games in the present embodiment) until the end of the hold effect, and the strong hold image is placed on the front side of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. Control is performed so as to reduce the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image over a predetermined period during the hold effect while maintaining the state of being superimposed and displayed.

  When the weak hold image is positioned at a specific position, the vertical size is displayed smaller than the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games on the back side, and the weak hold image is displayed at the specific position. Part of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is visible from the player side. On the other hand, when the strong hold image is positioned at a specific position, the size in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is displayed larger than the image suggesting the number of remaining navigation games on the back side, and the strong hold image is specified. When displayed at the position, all of the remaining navigation game number suggestion images are not visible from the player side. The strong hold image is displayed in a larger display mode than the weak hold image in a state where the strong hold image is positioned at a specific position, and the strong hold image is emphasized compared to the weak hold image. Therefore, it is suggested that it is controlled to the hold state. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish between the strong hold image and the weak hold image, they may be collectively referred to as a hold image.

  When the hold effect is controlled to the first hold state on the main control unit 41 side, the first hold effect indicating that the hold control is controlled, and the second hold state on the main control unit 41 side. A second hold effect that suggests that the hold state has been controlled.

  In the control of the hold effect, after the effect mode lottery is performed and the effect mode of the hold effect is determined, the first hold is determined according to the lottery result of the added state lottery specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41. Control is performed such that the effect or the second hold effect is performed in the effect mode (strong hold effect, weak hold effect) determined in the above-described effect mode lottery.

  Specifically, based on the command received from the main control unit 41, when it is specified that the main control unit 41 side does not win and the main control unit 41 controls the first hold state, the addition is performed. Control is performed so that the first hold effect is performed in the effect mode determined in the effect mode lottery over the first predetermined number of games (5 games in the present embodiment) from the game next to the game in which the state lottery is performed. On the other hand, when winning is determined in the added state lottery based on the command received from the main control unit 41 and the main control unit 41 is specified to be controlled to the second hold state, the added state lottery is performed. Control is performed so that the second hold effect is performed in the effect mode determined in the effect mode lottery from the next game to the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment).

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the case of controlling to the first hold effect, the next game of the game at which the first hold effect is started, that is, the extra state lottery is performed on the main control unit 41 side as described above. After displaying the hold image of the production mode determined by the production mode lottery at the specific position at the start of the game, until the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) elapses The state where the hold image is displayed at the specific position is maintained, and the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image on the back side of the hold image is lowered.

  Further, during the period in which the first hold effect is being performed, the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combination 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, and navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side. When the operation is performed, control is performed to perform a navigation effect that suggests the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are notified by the navigation notification.

  Then, after starting the first hold effect, a start operation for starting the next game after the first predetermined number of games has elapsed (operation of the start switch 7 in a state where a specified number of bets is set) Is performed, the first hold effect is ended, and control is performed to shift to the AT effect (normal) performed before the first hold effect is started.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, when controlling to the second hold effect, as in the case of controlling to the first hold effect, the main control is performed at the start of the second hold effect, that is, as described above. At the start of the next game of the game in which the addition state lottery is performed on the part 41 side, the hold image of the effect mode determined in the effect mode lottery is displayed at a specific position. Thereafter, the state in which the hold image is displayed at the specific position is maintained until the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) elapses, and the number of remaining navigation games on the back side of the hold image Reduce the visibility of the suggestion image.

  Then, after starting the second hold effect, after the start of the next game after the first predetermined number of games has elapsed, the second hold effect is continued and the second hold effect is started. The state in which the hold image is displayed at the specific position is maintained until the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) elapses.

  In addition, when the next game after the first predetermined number of games has started after the second hold effect is started, the second hold state is controlled, and an extra for notifying that it is controlled to the added state. A state determination effect is performed using the liquid crystal display 51. In the added state determination effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), a determination suggestion image (in this embodiment, a character image of “added state determination”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to win the additional lottery. This suggests that it has been determined that the number of navigation games is controlled so that the number of navigation games can be increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), after starting the added state effect suggesting that the added state is controlled and starting the second hold effect, the second predetermined number of games is The added state effect and the second hold effect are continued until the time has elapsed. In the added state effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a main effect image (in this embodiment, an image of a predetermined character riding on a disk-type vehicle) that is not displayed in the above-described AT effect (normal) and AT effect (ending). This indicates that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to be in the added state.

  Further, in the control of the second hold effect, when it is specified based on a command received from the main control unit 41 that the extra lottery is won and the number of navigation games is added, the extra lottery is performed. At the end of the played game, it is possible to perform an extra effect that suggests the result of the extra lottery. In the add-on effect, an add-on image (in this embodiment, “add-on + 10G GET !!”) suggesting the number of navigation games to be won and added in the add-on lottery specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41. By displaying the character image on the liquid crystal display 51, the number of added navigation games is suggested.

  In addition, in the control of the second hold effect, an additional effect is performed every time it is specified that the additional lottery is won and an additional number of navigation games has been performed. However, when each additional effect is performed, The total number of navigation games given during the second hold effect is summarized when the second hold effect is ended without adding the given number of navigation games to the number of navigation games in the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. The remaining navigation game number suggestion image is updated so as to be added. In addition, every time the number of navigation games is given in the extra lottery, the configuration is such that the number image of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is updated so as to add the number of navigation games given in each extra lottery. good.

  Further, during the period in which the second hold effect is being performed, the navigation target combination (in this embodiment, push order small combination 1 to 6) is won in the internal lottery, and navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side. In the same manner as in the period in which the first hold effect is being performed, control is performed so as to perform a navigation effect that suggests the operation order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are notified by the navigation notification.

  Then, after starting the second hold effect, a start operation for starting the next game after the second predetermined number of games has passed (operation of the start switch 7 in a state where a specified number of bets is set) Is performed, the second hold effect is ended, and control is performed so as to shift to the AT effect (normal) performed before the second hold effect is started.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 32B, the sub-control unit 91 is a period during which the first hold effect is being performed and a period during which the second hold effect is being performed, and the first predetermined number of games (this implementation) In the example, in the period until 5 games) have elapsed (the first 5 games among the periods controlled in the second hold state), the game is controlled in the second hold state, and the number of navigation games is increased. It is possible to perform a bonus grant suggestion that suggests the possibility.

  The sub-control unit 91 receives from the main control unit 41 in each game during the period in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed among the period in which the first hold effect is being performed and the period in which the second hold effect is being performed. Based on the command to be performed, when it is specified in the internal lottery that any of the push order small roles 1 to 6 has been won, a suggestion effect lottery is performed to determine whether or not a privilege grant suggestion effect is performed. Then, by winning the suggestion effect lottery, a bonus grant suggestion effect is performed at the start of the game won in the suggestion effect lottery. In the privilege grant suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), a privilege grant suggestion image (in this example, a character image of “CHANCE”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, thereby increasing the number of navigation games. Suggests the possibility of being done.

  In the suggestion effect lottery, when the second hold effect is performed, it is determined that the privilege grant suggestion effect is performed at a higher rate than when the first hold effect is performed. Since the giving suggestion effect is performed, the fact that the second hold effect is being performed, that is, the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the second hold state, and there is a high possibility that the number of navigation games will be added. It has come to suggest.

  Next, the flow of control related to the game by the main control unit 41 and the control related to the effect by the sub-control unit 91 related to the first hold effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 34, when the main control unit 41 controls the AT-related control state to the AT state and controls to the non-hold state (normal AT state) in which the hold control is not performed, the main control unit 41 performs navigation by internal lottery. When the combination (in this embodiment, push order small combination 1 to 6) is won, navigation notification is performed and control is performed so as to perform subtraction processing for subtracting the number of remaining navigation games. And, in the non-hold state, when an additional state lottery subject (in this embodiment, a specific small role 1 and a specific small role 2) is won, an additional state lottery is performed, and when the additional state lottery is not won Then, control is performed to shift to the first hold state (false precursor state).

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs an AT effect (normal) when the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the non-hold state, and it is specified that the navigation target combination has been won in the internal lottery. Control to perform a navigation effect corresponding to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side. In addition, at the start of each game that performs a navigation effect, that is, when the number of navigation games is subtracted on the main control unit 41 side, the number of navigation games in the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is updated to be decreased by one. To do.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 controls to perform the first hold effect while continuing the AT effect (normal) when the main control unit 41 shifts to the first hold state. In the first hold effect, the hold image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in the effect mode (strong hold effect, weak hold effect) determined in the effect mode lottery performed at the start of the effect, and the AT effect (normally ), The hold image of the first hold effect is displayed so as to be superimposed on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image displayed to control the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image.

  When the main control unit 41 is controlling to the first hold state, the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery to perform the navigation notification, but controls so as not to subtract the remaining number of navigation games.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs control so as to perform a navigation effect corresponding to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side in the game in which it is specified that the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery. However, the control is performed so as to maintain without updating the subtraction of the navigation game number of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs the suggestion effect lottery in the game in which the fact that the navigation target role has been won in the internal lottery is specified, and performs the bonus grant suggestion effect by winning the suggestion effect lottery, It is controlled to the second hold state, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the number of navigation games will be added.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 41 ends the control in the first hold state at the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the control in the first hold state. Then, the control is shifted to the non-hold state that was controlled before the control to the first hold state, and the next game of the game is controlled to the non-hold state (normal AT state).

  On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 ends the game when the first predetermined number of games (5 games in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the control of the first hold effect, that is, the main control unit 41. When the control of the first hold state is finished on the side, the control of the first hold effect is ended, and the AT effect (normal) performed before the control of the first hold effect is resumed. To control.

  Next, the flow of control related to the game by the main control unit 41 and the control related to the effect by the sub-control unit 91 relating to the second hold effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the main control unit 41 wins the control state related to the AT in the non-holding state (normal AT state), and the added state lottery target combination (specific small combination 1, specific small combination 2 in this embodiment) is won. In this case, an additional state lottery is performed, and when the additional state lottery is won, control is performed so as to shift to the second hold state (precursor state + additional state).

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls to perform the second hold effect while continuing the AT effect (normal) when the main control unit 41 shifts to the second hold state. In the second hold effect, as in the first hold effect described above, the hold image is displayed on the liquid crystal display in the effect mode (strong hold effect, weak hold effect) determined by the effect mode lottery performed at the start of the effect. 51. By displaying the hold image of the second hold effect superimposed on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image displayed by the AT effect (normal), the visibility of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is lowered. To control.

  In the second hold state, the main control unit 41 performs the internal lottery in the period until the first predetermined number of games elapses (precursor state) as in the case of controlling to the first hold state (false precursor state). When the navigation target combination is won and navigation notification is performed, control is performed so that the number of remaining navigation games is not subtracted, and control is performed so that the winning combination of the navigation target combination is not added and the lottery is not performed. . On the other hand, in the second hold state, during the period from when the first predetermined number of games has elapsed until the second predetermined number of games has elapsed (additional state), the first hold state (false precursor state) is controlled. Similarly to the time, when performing the navigation notification, control is performed so as not to perform the subtraction process for the number of remaining navigation games, and an extra lottery that is not performed when the control is in the first hold state (false precursor state). Control is performed when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, and the number of navigation games added by winning the extra lottery is added to the number of remaining navigation games.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 controls to perform the AT effect (normal) during the period from the start of the control of the second hold effect until the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed. On the other hand, in the game in which it is determined that the navigation target role has been won in the internal lottery, control is performed so as to perform a navigation effect according to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side, but the remaining navigation game number suggestion image Control to maintain without updating the number of navigation games.

  In the game in which it is specified that the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery during the period from the start of the control of the second hold effect until the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games elapses. As in the case of performing the hold effect, the suggestion effect lottery is performed, and by winning the suggestion effect lottery, the bonus grant suggestion effect is performed and the second hold state is controlled, and the number of navigation games is added. This suggests that there is a high possibility that

  Then, at the end of the game in which the first predetermined number of games have elapsed since the start of the control of the second hold effect, an added state determination effect is performed, which suggests that the main control unit 41 side is controlled to the added state. To do. After that, when the next game in which the added state finalizing effect is performed, that is, the next game of the game in which the first predetermined number of games has elapsed since the start of the control of the second hold effect is started, the added state effect is started. , Suggesting that it is controlled to the added state. Then, when it is specified that the extra lottery has been performed on the main control unit 41 side while performing the extra state effect, the extra effect is performed and the number of navigation games given in the extra lottery is added. Suggest a number.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 responds to the navigation notification performed on the main control unit 41 side in the game in which the fact that the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery is specified when performing the added state effect. Although the control is performed so as to perform the navigation effect, the control is performed so that the update is performed without subtracting the number of navigation games of the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. Then, when the added state effect is ended, the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is updated so that the total number of navigation games given by the added lottery is added to the number of navigation games during the period in which the added state effect is being performed. Control to do.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 41 ends the control in the second hold state at the end of the game in which the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) have elapsed since the start of the control in the second hold state. Then, the control is shifted to the non-hold state that was controlled before the control to the second hold state, and the next game of the game is controlled to the non-hold state (normal AT state).

  On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 ends the game in which the second predetermined number of games (15 games in this embodiment) have elapsed since the start of the control of the second hold effect, that is, the main control unit 41. When the control of the second hold state is ended on the side, the control of the second hold effect is ended, and the AT effect (normal) performed before the control of the second hold effect is resumed. To control.

  Thus, the sub-control unit 91 can display the remaining navigation game number suggestion image on the liquid crystal display 51 that displays the remaining number of navigation games in the AT state.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 reduces the remaining number of displayed navigation games when the remaining number of navigation games is reduced by performing the subtraction process of the number of navigation games on the main control unit 41 side. It is possible to update the number of remaining navigation game suggestion images.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 can perform a hold effect that suggests that the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in the hold state, and the hold effect is controlled to the hold state in the first hold state. A first hold effect that suggests the effect, and a second hold effect that indicates that the hold state is controlled in the second hold state.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 retains the hold image both when indicating that the first hold effect is controlled to the hold state and when indicating that the second hold effect is controlled to the hold state. By superimposing and displaying the navigation game number suggestion image on the player side, control is performed to reduce the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 can perform the first hold effect over the period controlled to the first hold state on the main control unit 41 side, and the hold image is displayed as the number of remaining navigation games during the first hold effect. By controlling the display so as to overlap the suggestion image, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is reduced over the period controlled in the first hold state.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 can perform the second hold effect over the period controlled to the second hold state on the main control unit 41 side, and the hold image is displayed as the number of remaining navigation games during the second hold effect. By controlling the display so as to overlap the suggestion image, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is reduced over the period controlled in the second hold state.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 controls the effect state controlled before controlling to the first hold effect and the second hold effect both after the first hold effect is ended and after the second hold effect is ended. And control is performed so as to perform the AT state (normal) in which the contents of the production are common.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs control so that the AT state (normal) is performed after the end of the first hold effect and after the end of the second hold effect, so that the first hold state is set on the main control unit 41 side. Even after the end and the second hold state are ended, the common AT effect (normal) background image A is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 performs the first hold effect when being controlled to the first hold state on the main control unit 41 side, and performs the second hold effect when being controlled to the second hold state. It is possible to add the number of navigation games because it is controlled to the second hold state both when performing the first hold effect and when performing the second hold effect. It is possible to perform a bonus grant suggestion that suggests.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 is capable of performing the privilege giving suggestion effect even when the main control unit 41 is controlled to the first hold state and performing the first hold effect. Even in the hold state, it is controlled to the second hold state as a privilege by the privilege grant suggesting effect, which suggests the possibility of adding an additional number of navigation games.

[Operation effect 1]
Some conventional slot machines are controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and are configured to include an advantageous state lamp that is turned on over the period controlled to the advantageous state. In the slot machine having such a configuration, no consideration is given to the timing when the advantageous state lamp is turned on or turned off.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes an advantageous zone shift lottery target and shifts to the advantageous zone in the advantageous zone shift lottery. In this case, it is possible to shift the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section advantageous to the player, and the advantageous section notification LED 12a for informing that the transition to the advantageous section has been made (the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12). 8th segment), and after the transition to the advantageous section, the navigation notification is performed first, so that the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on at the start of the game when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. It is possible to notify that it has shifted to the section, and before the first navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a starts to be turned on. It is. In such a configuration, by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section is controlled by starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to start the navigation notification on the game assistance indicator 12 after starting the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, but the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the game assistance display are started. The structure which the display of the navigation alerting | reporting in the device 12 is started simultaneously may be sufficient. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section is controlled by starting to turn on the advantageous section notification LED 12a by the time the navigation notification is performed in the advantageous section.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can end the advantageous section when the advantageous section ending condition is satisfied when the advantageous section is controlled. Is provided with an advantageous section notification LED 12a (eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) for notifying that it has ended, and when it is an advantageous section, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be lit. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a specific result (small role), the main control unit 41 can stop different symbol combinations on the reel according to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended differs depending on the stopped symbol combination. It can be focused on the notification by the interval notifying LED 12a.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 uses different symbol combinations depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined result (re-playing combination). Since the timing at which the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended is shared by the stopped symbol combination, the suggestion by the advantageous section notification LED 12a is possible. Can prevent the player from being confused.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to store the number of medals owned by the player as credits and to settle the medal number stored as credits when the settlement operation by the settlement switch 10 is performed. When the advantageous section ends, the main control unit 41 notifies the advantageous section that the advantageous section has ended by the advantageous section notification LED 12a in a period until the acceptance of the settlement operation becomes valid after being stopped by the reel. Since it is a structure, after recognizing that the advantageous area was complete | finished, a player can complete | finish a game.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, when the small role wins and ends the advantageous section, the advantageous section at a timing after the display of the number of paid-out medals by the game auxiliary display 12 is completed. Since the notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended after recognizing that the medal has been paid out.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the re-gamer wins and ends the advantageous section, it is advantageous at the timing after the notification that the re-game is given is completed by starting the lighting of the LED 20 during replay. Since the section notification LED 12a notifies that the advantageous section has ended, it is possible to suggest that the advantageous section has ended after recognizing that the replay has been granted.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the advantageous section ends, after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped and the lighting of the insertion request LED 17 is started, the medal insertion Since the advantageous section notification LED 12a notifies the fact that the advantageous section has ended at a timing before the fact that the advantageous section has been notified, the player starts the next game without knowing that the advantageous section has ended. It is possible to prevent a medal from being inserted in order to make it happen.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment displays a navigation notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R which is advantageous to the player, and a medal payout number to be paid to the player with the winning of the small role. It is possible to control the eighth segment of the right side display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be in a lighting state during the period in which the game auxiliary display 12 is provided and controlled in the advantageous section. It is a configuration capable of notifying that it has shifted to the section, and is configured to notify that it has shifted to the advantageous section and that the advantageous section has ended by using a part of the game auxiliary indicator 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Therefore, as a display means for notifying that it has shifted to the advantageous section, a display means separate from the game auxiliary indicator 12 for displaying the navigation notification and the medal payout number is displayed. There is no need to provide the control unit 41.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to use a part of the game assistance indicator 12 as the advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended. The display means provided separately from the display 12 may be used as an advantageous section notification LED 12a to notify that the transition to the advantageous section has been made. For example, the game auxiliary display 12 and the game auxiliary display 12 A configuration may be adopted in which display means such as separate LEDs and lamps are arranged and the display means is used to notify that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended. According to this configuration, the display means for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended is provided separately from the game auxiliary indicator 12, so that a display for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted is displayed. It can be clearly distinguished from other displays, and even in this case, it is provided in the vicinity of the display means, so that oversight by the player can be prevented.

  It should be noted that display means for notifying that the advantageous section has been shifted and that the advantageous section has ended are, for example, various indicators such as the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the insertion request LED 17 provided in the game display unit 13. By disposing on the substrate on which the display device and the like are disposed, the display means can be provided in the vicinity of the game auxiliary display device 12, and an oversight by the player can be prevented. Further, display means for notifying that the vehicle has shifted to the advantageous section is arranged around the switches that are operated at the start or end of the game, such as the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10, for example. , Can prevent oversight by the player.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 shifts the game section to the advantageous section, and then establishes the advantageous section notification start condition, so that the advantageous section notification is started at the start of the game in which the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied. A configuration in which the lighting of the LED 12a is started to notify that it has shifted to the advantageous section, while the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off at the end of the game in which the advantageous section is ended to notify that the advantageous section has ended. However, the main control unit 41 lights the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the end of the game to be shifted to the advantageous section, notifies that it has shifted to the advantageous section, and at the end of the game at which the advantageous section is ended, A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned off to notify that the advantageous section is ended.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment includes an advantageous section notification LED 12a (eighth segment of the right display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12) that notifies that the advantageous section has been shifted and the advantageous section has ended. By controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to be turned off, it is possible to notify that the advantageous section has ended, and in the main process, the state control data (turned off) is stored in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Before performing the setting process, the AT state management process initializes a predetermined area in which data relating to the advantageous section is stored in the RAM 41c, thereby initializing the data relating to the advantageous section. Although the section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off and the fact that the advantageous section has ended is notified, the advantageous section is related. That data can be prevented from remaining in a predetermined area of RAM 41c.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the data related to the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c before performing the process of setting the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. By performing the process, the data related to the advantageous section is initialized before the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be turned off. It may be configured to initialize data related to the For example, by setting the processing for setting the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process for initializing the data regarding the advantageous section in the timer interrupt process performed at the same timing. The control for turning off the advantageous section notification LED 12a and the process of initializing the data relating to the advantageous section can be performed at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to initialize the data related to the advantageous section before controlling the advantageous section notification LED 12a to the extinguished state. The section notification LED 12a may be controlled to be turned off. In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data relating to the advantageous section from being initialized during the period in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a is controlled to be in the lighting state.

  In the main process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores the data related to the advantageous section in the AT state management process before performing the process of setting the state control data (turned off) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. The initialization process for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized by the initialization process does not include the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a. Since the data relating to the advantageous section initialized by the above-mentioned configuration does not include the state control data (lighting) set in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a, the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a is used for state control. Before performing the process of setting the data (lights off), the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a Since the set state control data (lighting) is not initialized by the initialization process in the AT state management process, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is surely controlled to be lit until the advantageous section ends. Can do.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs a net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section (from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section, the total number of medals used for setting the bet number in the advantageous section). It is possible to update a net increase counter for counting the number of sheets obtained by subtracting the number of sheets, and the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section specified based on the value of the net increase counter is a predetermined rule. Number of sheets (in this embodiment, a value (2388) obtained by subtracting the maximum number (15) of payouts in the slot machine 1 from 2400 and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the number of bets) If the specified number of medals in the advantageous zone exceeds the specified number + 1, the advantageous zone data initialization process is performed to end the advantageous zone. The main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter when updating the net increase number counter, and updates the net increase number counter. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the medal value used for setting is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, and when the calculated value is 0 or more, By controlling to update the value of the net increase counter so that the calculated value becomes the value of the net increase counter, the net increase of medals is calculated starting from when the net increase of medals has decreased most since the start of the advantageous period. Based on the value of the net increase counter, the advantageous interval is terminated and the normal interval is shifted to the normal interval when the net increase in medals exceeds a specified number.

  According to this configuration, after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase in medals up to the present when the net increase in gaming value has decreased the most, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section Even if the net increase in medals starting from the start of the advantageous section does not exceed the specified number, it is advantageous if the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number after the medal starts to increase. Since the section ends, not only the net increase of medals in the advantageous section but also the net increase of medals after the start of the advantageous section can be limited to a range based on the prescribed number.

  In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 specifies the payout number value of medals to be paid out based on the winning flag of the game during the advantageous period. Based on the net increase value obtained by adding the payout number to the net increase value specified based on the net increase counter and subtracting the number of medals used for the bet from the net increase value after the addition The configuration for counting the net increase counter to be updated, that is, the net increase in medals in the advantageous section counted by the net increase counter is configured based on the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game in the advantageous section. The net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is set by the player as the bet number based on at least the number of medals awarded to the player. It is sufficient if the medal used in the game is subtracted, and when the player is allowed to win a predetermined small role with an actual medal grant in the internal lottery, and the player generates a prize for the small role. In the case where it is not possible to win a prize in spite of the situation that can be awarded, the medal that is given as if the winning of the small role has occurred is regarded as the medal given to the player. The structure which counts may be sufficient.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 reads the net increase number value specified based on the net increase number counter into a predetermined register, and then performs the game. Specify the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning flag, add the number of medals to the net increase value in the predetermined register, and subtract the number of medals used to set the bet number from the net increase value after the addition The main controller 41 updates the net increase number counter based on the net increase number value obtained in this way. However, when the net increase number counter is updated, the main control unit 41 uses the payout number value of medals to be paid out in the game. By adding the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of medals used to set the number of bets in the game to the net increase counter, the net increase Counter may be updated to configure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines the net increase number specified based on the net increase number counter when determining whether or not the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number in the AT state management process. After the numerical value is read into a predetermined register, the payout number value of medals to be paid out is specified based on the winning flag of the game, the payout number is added to the net increase number value of the predetermined register, and the bet is calculated from the net increase value after the addition. A configuration in which a net increase number value in the game is calculated in a predetermined register by subtracting the number of medals used for setting the number, and it is determined whether or not the net increase number value in the predetermined register exceeds a prescribed number However, the main control unit 41 calculates the net increase number of the game based on the medal payout number value and the number of medals used for setting the bet number in the game. The calculated net increase number is added to the net increase number counter, and the net increase number counter is updated. A configuration for determining may be used.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter. When the calculated value obtained by subtracting the medal value used for setting is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0. When the value is less than 0, the numerical value lower than 0 is not counted and only the numerical value higher than 0 is counted. A configuration that counts the net increase in value may also be used. For example, the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase number counter to 0 at the start of the advantageous section, and then when the medal is paid out in the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 sets the value corresponding to the number of paid out medals to the net increase number counter. When a medal is used to set the number of bets, the process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of medals from the net increase number counter is repeatedly performed so that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. Counting is possible both when the number of medals increases and decreases below 0 and when the number of medals increases and decreases above 0.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals starting from the time when the net increase in medals has decreased most, based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section. However, the main control unit 41, as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, when the net increase in medals up to the present starting from the normal section to the advantageous section exceeds the specified number In this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase of medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set. Since there is no need to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from the time other than when the transition to the advantageous section, the end condition of the advantageous section is determined based on the value of the net increase counter. It is possible to simplify the control determines the.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals starting from the time when the net increase in medals has decreased most, based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section. However, the main control unit 41, as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, suggests that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the AT state after the transition to the advantageous section and the navigation notification When the operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the above, the configuration may be such that when the net increase in medals up to the present exceeds the specified number, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is shifted to. According to this, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is notified. It is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase of medals starting from the point other than when the operation mode for increasing the medal is notified by the navigation notification, which indicates that the ED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the net increase in medals starting from when the net increase in medals has decreased most, based on the value of the net increase counter after the start of the advantageous section. However, the main control unit 41, regardless of whether or not an operation mode for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section as a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section. In addition, when it is suggested by the advantageous section notification LED 12a that the state has shifted to the AT state, when the net increase in medals up to now exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section is terminated and the normal section is shifted to. Well, according to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section Regardless of whether or not an operation mode for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification, the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the advantageous section is based on a net increase in medals starting from a point other than when it is suggested that the transition to the advantageous section is suggested. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the advantageous section, the AT state in which the navigation notification that informs the player of the operation mode advantageous for the player when the navigation target combination is won by the internal lottery is performed, Even if the winning role is selected in the lottery, it is possible to control to the control state related to the AT including the warning state in which the navigation notification is not performed, and when updating the net increase counter in the AT state management process, Regardless of whether the control state related to the AT is the AT state or not, a winning with a payout of medals occurs, so that the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase counter, and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section However, when the main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter, the control state related to the AT is in a control state other than the AT state during the advantageous period. In this case, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an operation mode advantageous to the player and the medal is increased, the increment is added to the net increase counter, and the internal lottery When the navigation target combination is won and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are not operated and the medals do not increase in an operation mode advantageous to the player, the net increase counter is not added, and the AT control is performed in the advantageous section. When the state is the AT state and the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated and the medals are increased in an operation mode advantageous to the player. , The increment of medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in an advantageous manner for the player is added to the net increase counter. Thus, the configuration may be such that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. According to this configuration, in the sign state in which the operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified in the advantageous section, the navigation target role is determined by internal lottery. If the number of medals actually increases even if is won, it is added to the net increase counter, and if the medal cannot be increased, it is not added to the net increase counter. In the AT state in which the mode is notified, the net increase counter is added regardless of whether or not the medal has actually increased when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery. If it is possible to increase the number of medals, regardless of whether the number of medals has actually increased or not, it is possible to intentionally extend the advantageous section by adding the net increase counter. If the situation is such that the player cannot reliably increase medals, adding the net increase counter only when the medals actually increase may be disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when updating the net increase counter, if the control state related to AT is a control state other than the AT state in the advantageous section, the number increases when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery and medals increase. When the number of minutes to be added is added to the net increase number counter and the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, but the medal is not increased, the net increase number counter is not added and the control state related to AT is in the AT state in the advantageous section In addition, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the increase in medals when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player regardless of whether or not medals have increased. Is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. Regardless of which control state the control state is related to, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a predetermined small role in which the predetermined operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing medals does not change, Regardless of whether or not the number of medals operated in a predetermined operation mode is increased, the increment of medals when operated in the predetermined operation mode is added to the net increase counter to count the net increase in medals in the advantageous section However, according to this configuration, if the player can increase the medals in the advantageous section, the net increase counter can be added regardless of whether or not the medals have actually increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being intentionally extended.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment has at least one of the conditions that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and that the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games specified based on the advantageous section game number counter has reached the upper limit number of games. When it is determined that the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed without determining whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, Since it is configured to end, when it is established that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games as an end condition of the advantageous section, Since it is not necessary to perform the determination of whether a net increase number exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to simplify the control according to the determination of whether a net increase number exceeds a predetermined number in the preferred interval.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment has at least one of a condition that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and a net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. In the AT state management process, it is first determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. In the AT state management process, first, in the AT state management process, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. Therefore, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and ends the advantageous section, it is related to the determination of whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. Than the control can be omitted control according to the determination whether the net increase number exceeds a specified number of complicated advantageous period.

  In the present embodiment, in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 first determines whether or not the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games, and the number of advantageous section games has not reached the upper limit number of games. In this case, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number. In the AT state management process, first, it is determined whether or not the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the predetermined number. If the net increase in the section does not exceed the prescribed number, it may be configured to determine whether the number of advantageous section games has reached the upper limit number of games. According to this configuration, the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games. Since the frequency at which the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number can be higher than the frequency at which the control is performed, the control related to the determination of the low frequency event can be omitted.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment has at least one of a condition that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games and a net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. The advantageous section is terminated when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, and the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. If the number reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number, the common advantageous section data initialization process is performed, and the common data (data regarding the advantageous section) is obtained. Since it is a configuration to be initialized, the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the net increase in the advantageous section This is common when either the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number is established. Since the data is initialized, it is possible to prevent a difference in advantage between when both of these conditions are satisfied and when only one of the conditions is satisfied.

  For example, as the first condition, when the advantageous section ends only when the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, the data corresponding to the first condition is initialized, and the second condition is In the configuration in which the data corresponding to the second condition is initialized when only the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the specified number of sheets and the advantageous section ends, both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. When the advantageous section ends, if the data corresponding to the first condition and the data corresponding to the second condition are initialized, the game is more effective than the case where either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Although it may be disadvantageous for the user, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied in the advantageous section, it is common with the case where either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the advantageous section By adopting a configuration for initializing data, there is a difference in the advantage between when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied and when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Can be prevented.

  In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment determines that the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games in the AT state management process, and the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number. Since the advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the conditions is satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section continues for a long period of time. Even if the advantageous section does not continue for a long period of time, if the medal increases rapidly in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends when the net increase in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, It is possible to prevent the advantage in the advantageous section from increasing excessively.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment sets the control state data (lighted) in the output buffer of the advantageous section notification LED 12a when the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, and waits for one interrupt. After performing the above, by controlling the display of the navigation notification to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the instruction setting process, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is turned on, and then the game auxiliary display 12 In a configuration in which navigation notification is started and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification in a game in which it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section. The timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals by navigation notification is notified. Since it is suggested that the section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section, in the game in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a suggests that the section has shifted to the advantageous section, stop switches 8L, 8C, When the operation mode of 8R is notified, it is suggested that the advantageous zone notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous zone before the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals by the navigation notification is notified. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals in the game after recognizing that the period has shifted to the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 indicates that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at a timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals by navigation notification is notified. Although it is a suggested structure, in the game where the advantageous section notification start condition is satisfied, the advantageous section notification LED 12a is at the same timing as the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals by navigation notification. It may be a configuration in which it is suggested that the lighting has started and the shift to the advantageous section is suggested. According to this configuration, in the game in which the advantageous section notification LED 12a indicates that the shift to the advantageous section is suggested, the medal is increased by the navigation notification. When the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to be notified is notified, Since it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at the same timing as the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R for increasing the medal by the notification is notified, the fact that it has shifted to the advantageous section The operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals can be recognized simultaneously.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 indicates that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section at a timing before the timing at which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals by navigation notification is notified. In the game where the advantageous section notification LED 12a suggests that the transition to the advantageous section is suggested, when the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase medals is notified by the navigation notification, After the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified by the navigation, it may be configured to start the lighting of the advantageous section notification LED 12a and to indicate that it has shifted to the advantageous section. In a game in which it is suggested that the advantageous section notification LED 12a has shifted to the advantageous section. When the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase the medal is notified by the navigation notification, the advantageous section after the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that increase the medal is notified by the navigation notification Since the notification LED 12a suggests that the transition to the advantageous section has been made, it is suggested at what timing the transition to the advantageous section is suggested after the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R for increasing medals is notified. You can focus on it.

[Operation effect 2]
As a conventional slot machine, it is designed to control the advantageous section that can inform the player about the advantageous operation mode, and the medal payout rate is appropriate when the special winning prize is carried over There is a thing of the structure.

  In the configuration where the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the state where the winning of the special prize is carried over like the latter slot machine, when the slot machine is first installed in the amusement store or data When the game is initialized, it is necessary to play a game on the game store side until a special prize is won so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. On the other hand, in the case of controlling the advantageous section like the former slot machine, if it is configured to be controlled to the advantageous section in the situation where the game store side plays until the special prize is won, before the player plays the game Since there is a possibility of being controlled to an advantageous section, there is a risk that fairness may be lost when a player plays a game.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special combination (BB) is won in the internal lottery and the symbol combination of the special combination (BB) is not derived, the special combination (BB) It is possible to carry over the winning game after the next game, and the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, which is advantageous to the player when the push order small role is won in the internal lottery It is possible to perform navigation notification to notify, and it is possible to control to an advantageous section that can notify the correct push order by navigation notification, and the special role (BB) winning is carried over It is possible to notify the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous for the navigation notification in the inside, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside. It is possible to control the advantageous section in the non-internal and internal areas where the special role (BB) is not carried over, and the end condition of the advantageous section in the interior is at least the end condition 1, One of the end conditions 2 is satisfied, while the end condition of the advantageous section in the non-inside is that the end condition 3 is satisfied. The end condition of the advantageous section in the inside and the advantage in the non-inside The section end conditions are different from each other.

  According to this configuration, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, the end condition of the advantageous section in the inside and the non-inside inside Since the end condition of the advantageous section is different, suitable control can be performed depending on whether it is inside or not inside.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct pressing order can be notified by navigation notification, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the interior, The medal payout rate is inadequate and can be controlled to an advantageous section both inside and inside, and whether or not the game state is non-internal in each game in the advantageous section If it is determined that it is in the non-inside, the advantageous section is started by controlling the advantageous section to end at the end of the game. In this game, the advantageous section is ended.

  According to this configuration, when the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the inside, the payout rate of medals is not appropriate in the non-inside, and the medal payout rate is Since the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, the player can play the game even if the game is controlled in the advantageous section in a situation where the game shop side plays until the inside of the inside where the payout rate of the medal becomes appropriate. The advantageous section ends before the game is performed, and it is possible to prevent the fairness from being lost when the player plays the game.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal for each game in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the game state is non-internal, the advantageous section is terminated at the end of the game. By controlling so that the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started, but the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the advantageous section has started. For example, only in the first game of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is non-internal, and if it is determined that the game state is non-internal, it is advantageous at the end of the game. It may be configured to control to end the section.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 is controlled in the game in the advantageous section by applying that the gaming state is non-internal as an arbitrary condition (end condition 3) of the ending conditions of the advantageous section. When it is established that the gaming state being non-internal is established, the advantageous section is controlled so that the advantageous section is terminated. Although it is a configuration for ending the advantageous section, as an optional condition, it may be applied that the controlled gaming state becomes inside, and when it is inside the case when controlling to the advantageous section in non-inside, it becomes inside The configuration may be such that the advantageous section is terminated when an arbitrary condition is satisfied. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, a game (non-inside and inside) in which the gaming state is changed from non-inside to inside by referring to the game state of the game and the winning status of special roles. In the game in which the winning of the special role is specified), the control is made so as to end the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, an arbitrary condition is established when the inside becomes the inside The advantageous section can be terminated as follows. Moreover, the structure which terminates the said advantageous area may be sufficient as arbitrary conditions are materialized when it becomes inside. For example, when controlling to an advantageous section, a game in which the game state is changed from non-internal to internal is determined by referring to the game state of the game and the game state of the previous game (the previous game is not In the game where the current game is inside, the control is made so that the advantageous section is terminated. It can be set as the structure which terminates the said advantageous area as said having been established.

  According to this configuration, when the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and when the medal payout rate is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-inside, Since the advantageous section is ended by being in the middle, even if it is controlled to the advantageous section in a situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the inside where the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate, even before the player plays a game Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fairness from being lost when the player plays a game.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled as non-internal, internal, or special state as a gaming state. The special state is a combination of BB general and a special combination (RB) in the BB general. In general, the probability that a special combination (RB) allowed to derive a special combination (RB) will be won in the internal lottery is normal (non- RB has a higher probability of winning a winning combination in the internal lottery than the non-inner and the inside. In general, the BB is not controlled to an advantageous section.

  According to this configuration, in the BB general where the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, it is not controlled to the advantageous section, so unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the BB general is not required.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled as non-internal, internal, or special state as a gaming state. The special state is a combination of BB general and a special combination (RB) in the BB general. In general, the probability that a special combination (RB) allowed to derive a special combination (RB) will be won in the internal lottery is normal (non- RB has a higher probability of winning a winning combination in the internal lottery than the non-inner and the inside. In other words, the RB is not controlled in the advantageous section.

  According to this configuration, an RB whose medal payout rate is not appropriate is not controlled to an advantageous section, and therefore unnecessary control regarding the advantageous section in the RB is not required.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to a state other than the general BB (non-inside, inside, or RB), the special role (RB) is not subject to the internal lottery while the gaming state is BB. When it is general, by being subject to internal lottery, in general BB, the probability that the special combination (RB) that allows the derivation of the special combination (RB) symbol combination is won in the internal lottery is normal (non- In the configuration in which the special role (RB) is subject to lottery in the internal lottery even when the gaming state is controlled to be non-internal or internal. The probability that the special role (RB) wins in the internal lottery in the general BB is compared with the probability that the special role (RB) wins in the internal lottery in at least one of the non-internal or internal states. A high configuration may be used.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a sub-control unit 91 that can execute an internal medium suggestion that indicates that it is inside, and a main that can execute an advantageous section notification that indicates that it is controlled in an advantageous section. The control unit 41, and the sub-control unit 91 suggests that the game state has been shifted to the inside by ending the preparation effect at the end of the game when the game state has been shifted from the non-inside to the inside. While the internal suggestion can be executed using the liquid crystal display 51, the main control unit 41 uses the advantageous section notification LED 12a at the start of the next game of the game in which the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section. Advantageous section notification can be performed, and the position where the internal medium suggestion is executed is different from the position where the advantageous section notification is executed, and the timing when the internal medium suggestion is executed and the advantageous section notification is executed. Thailand And ring, is a different configuration.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a misunderstanding of the suggestion that the inside has become inside due to the inside suggestion and the suggestion that the inside has been shifted to the advantageous section by the advantageous section notification.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct push order can be notified by navigation notification, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the interior, Is provided with a main control unit 41 capable of executing an advantageous zone notification that suggests that the medal payout rate is inappropriate and is controlled to be in an advantageous zone, both inside and outside. The main control unit 41 can shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) for performing the navigation notification when the inside is being controlled and the advantageous zone is being controlled. After the transition to the section, it is possible to execute the advantageous section notification when the inside is controlled to the advantageous section by controlling to perform the advantageous section notification in the game that performs the navigation notification first. Is configured to not perform favorable interval notification if it is controlled advantageously interval in the non-internally in.

  According to this configuration, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate. If controlled, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the advantageous section notification is not executed when the advantageous section is controlled in the non-inside, so the medal payout rate In the situation where the game store plays a game until the inside becomes appropriate, unnecessary advantageous section notification is not executed.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section in which the correct push order can be notified by navigation notification, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the interior, Is a configuration in which the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, and a main control unit 41 capable of executing an advantageous zone notification that suggests that the medal is being controlled to an advantageous zone, and an internal Provided with a sub-control unit 91 capable of executing suggestions, and can be controlled to an advantageous section in both non-inside and inside, and when the main control unit 41 is controlling in the inside and the advantageous section In addition, it is possible to shift to the AT state (low accuracy / high accuracy) in which the navigation notification is performed, and after the transition to the advantageous section, control is performed so that the advantageous section notification is performed in the game in which the navigation notification is performed first. so When it is controlled to the advantageous section in the non-inside, the advantageous section notification is not executed, but the sub-control unit 91 performs the preparation effect to be performed when being controlled in the non-inside from the inside to the inside. When the transition is made, the transition is made from the non-inside to the inside by performing the control so that the normal stage effect is performed in the inside without performing the preparation in preparation when the inside is controlled. In this case, the internal suggestion is executed.

  According to this configuration, the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside, while the medal payout rate is not appropriate in the non-inside, and the medal payout rate is appropriate in the inside where the medal payout rate is appropriate. If controlled, the advantageous section notification can be executed, but if the medal payout rate is not appropriate, the main control unit 41 does not execute the advantageous section notification when the advantageous section is controlled. In the situation where the game store side plays the game until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, unnecessary suggestion is not executed, but in the case of transition from non-inside to inside, the sub-control unit Since the inside suggestion by 91 is executed, it is possible to specify that the medal payout rate has become an appropriate inside in a situation where a game is played at the game store side.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 causes the main control unit 41 to display a non-internal gaming state by causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display a preparation-in-progress screen and a non-internal-indication screen during the preparation-in-progress. It is controlled to be in the middle or special state and suggests that the medal payout rate has not been shifted to the appropriate inside, but the preparation effect is at least the main control unit 41 side paying out medals. The sub control unit 91 may be configured to display only the screen being prepared on the liquid crystal display 51 in the preparation effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs the preparation effect when the gaming state is controlled to the non-internal state, while when the gaming state is controlled to the internal state, In this configuration, the internal state suggests that the gaming state has shifted from the non-internal state to the internal state, but the internal state suggestion is at least an internal state where the payout rate of medals is appropriate. As long as it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-inside to the inside in the situation where the game store side plays the game, the period during which the main control unit 41 controls the inside While performing a specific effect (for example, an effect of displaying a specific image on the liquid crystal display 51, an effect of controlling a specific LED to be in a lighting state, an effect of outputting specific sound from the speakers 53, 54, etc.) Controlled inside The specific effect may not be performed in a period during which the specific effect is performed, or the specific effect may be performed over a period that is controlled in the inside, while the specific effect may not be performed in the period that is controlled in the interior. . In these configurations, the specific effect may be performed during one game or may be performed over a plurality of games. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-internal to the internal in the situation where the game store side plays until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. is there.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 performs a non-internal display effect that is not performed when the gaming state is controlled inside, every time the gaming state is controlled inside non-inside, Each time the gaming state changes from non-internal to internal, the internal medium suggests that it has shifted from non-internal to internal, but the internal medium suggests that at least the medal payout rate is appropriate. In the situation where the game store side plays the game until it becomes the inside, it is sufficient that it can indicate that the gaming state has shifted from the non-inside to the inside, and the main control unit 41 side performs the RAM clear. After it is determined that the gaming state has not yet been transferred to the inside, the storage means (for example, the non-internal state being controlled, the slot machine 1 at the time of factory shipment, etc. (for example, (E.g. RAM) is initialized After being played, the game state is not yet controlled to the inside on the main control unit 41 side, and the non-inside display effect is performed in the controlled non-inside, and the non-inside inside transitions to the inside. After being done, it may be configured such that the non-internal display effect is not performed even if the non-internal display effect is made. In such a configuration, after the situation where the game shop side plays a game until the inside of the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, unnecessary internal suggestion is not executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the inside suggestion is performed by the effect mode controlled by the sub-control unit 91, but the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform the inside suggestion. For example, when the main control unit 41 includes an LED indicator that suggests that the main control unit 41 is not inside or inside, and the LED display is not inside. It is possible to adopt a configuration that suggests that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling to the off state when the inside is in the inside, or the lighting state when the LED indicator is inside. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest that the inside has been shifted to the inside by controlling to be turned off when it is not inside. Moreover, in the structure provided with the LED display which suggests that the main control part 41 is not inside or inside, the indicator (for example, game assistance) which performs the said LED display other than an inside suggestion etc. It may be configured to be shared with the display unit 12 or the like, or may be configured as a dedicated display unit that performs only internal suggestion.

[Operation effect 3]
As a conventional slot machine, there is a configuration that controls an advantageous state advantageous to the player and terminates the advantageous state when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches 1500 games which is a limit value.

  In the slot machine having such a configuration, when the number of games controlled to the advantageous state reaches the limit value, the advantageous state ends, but even in a situation where the number of games controlled to the advantageous state does not reach the limit value, There is a possibility that an advantageous situation may occur in the meantime, and it is not possible to sufficiently prevent an excessive advantage.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. The main control unit 41 includes the number of advantageous section games and medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. The net increase number can be counted and updated, and the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in the present embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section Can be terminated when either one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding the prescribed number (2388 in the present embodiment) is satisfied. In addition, when the slot machine 1 reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number. A sub-control unit capable of executing a common advantageous section end notice for notifying that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established regardless of when the previous second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached. 91, the sub-control unit 91 includes the remaining number of games up to the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games as information related to the end condition 1 and information on the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section as information related to the end condition 2 in the common advantageous section end notice. This is a configuration in which both the remaining number up to the upper limit number are notified.

  According to this configuration, the end condition 1 that is established when the number of advantageous section games updated in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games or the net increase in the number of medals updated in the advantageous section is established when the number exceeds the specified number. Even when one of the end conditions 2 is not satisfied, the advantageous section is ended when the other is satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being excessively advantageous by being controlled to the advantageous section. Moreover, it is advantageous in any case when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games and when the net increase in number of medals reaches the second predetermined value before reaching the prescribed number. Since the common advantageous section end notice is executed to notify that the end condition of the section is almost established, it can be notified in advance that the advantageous section will be ended. Is established and the advantageous section can be prevented from suddenly ending. At this time, since the common advantageous section end notice includes both information related to the end condition 1 and information related to the end condition 2, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is used even if the common advantageous section end notice is included. It is possible to recognize in advance that the advantageous section will end by

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 establishes the advantageous section end condition 1 when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number) reaches the upper limit number of games (first specified value). It is determined that the advantageous section is ended, and it is determined that the advantageous section ending condition 1 is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (first specified value). The advantageous section may be configured to end, or the advantageous section end condition 1 is reached when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (first prescribed value −1) immediately before reaching the upper limit number of games (first prescribed value). It may be determined that is established and the advantageous section is terminated. In addition, the main control unit 41 determines that the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (second prescribed value), and terminates the advantageous section. However, if the net increase in the advantageous zone reaches the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number (second specified value + 1) or more than the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number, the favorable condition end condition 2 is satisfied. The configuration may be such that it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the advantageous section ends.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the advantageous section end notice when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment). The advantage section end notice is executed when the number of games exceeds the first predetermined value, but it is advantageous when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value immediately before reaching the first predetermined value (1399 games). It may be configured to execute a section end notice. Further, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute the advance notice of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that an advantageous section end notice is executed when the number of sheets reaches a second predetermined value or more, or an advantageous section end notice is executed when the net increase in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value + 1. .

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that can be controlled in an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. The main control unit 41 counts the number of advantageous section games and the net increase in medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. The end condition 1 established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), or the net increase in medals in the advantageous section is the prescribed number In the embodiment, when any one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding 2388) is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated.

  According to this configuration, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the net increase in the number of medals increased during the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number and reaches the prescribed number + 1 or more. Since the section ends, it can be suppressed that the section becomes advantageous more than being controlled to the advantageous section.

  When the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached before reaching the value, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established The advantageous section end notice includes the difference in the number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied, that is, the remaining number of games up to the upper limit of the number of advantageous section games, and the net increase in medals until the end condition 2 is satisfied. Difference, that is, in a manner in which the remaining number up to the prescribed number of medals is increased, and the end condition 1 is satisfied each time the advantageous section game number and the medals net increase number are updated. A configuration in which the difference of medals net increase number of preferably up period number of games of the difference and the termination condition 2 is satisfied is updated.

  According to this configuration, the remaining number of advantageous section games until the end condition 1 is satisfied and the remaining medal net increase until the end condition 2 is satisfied are recognized in real time every time the remaining value changes. Can do.

  When the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games, the net number of medals in the advantageous section is the specified number. In any case when the second predetermined value (2089 in this embodiment) is reached before reaching the value, it is possible to execute a common advantageous section end notice to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established The advantageous section end notice is the case where the upper limit number of advantageous section games (1500 games in this embodiment) when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied and the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied. The specified number of medals with net increase is notified in a identifiable manner, and is started when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value, or when the net number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value. ,advantageous Termination condition is satisfied is near or that establishment of termination condition 2 1 between is configured to notify that close.

  According to this configuration, the player is made to recognize the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games related to the advantageous section end condition 1 and the prescribed number of medals net increase in the advantageous section related to the advantageous section end condition 2. And the player can be made aware that the end condition 1 is close or the end condition 2 is close.

  In the advantageous section end notice of this embodiment, the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section game when the advantageous section end condition 1 is satisfied and the prescribed number of medals net increase when the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied. Although it is configured to notify in an identifiable manner, the prescribed number of advantageous section games when the end condition 1 is satisfied (the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games), and the upper limit of the net medal increase number when the end condition 2 is satisfied A configuration in which the number of sheets can be identified is also possible. In such a configuration, the player is made to recognize the prescribed number of games of the advantageous section games related to the advantageous section end condition 1 and the upper limit number of medals in the advantageous section related to the advantageous section end condition 2. In addition, the player can be made aware that the completion of the end condition 1 is near or the end condition 2 is close.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment defines the end condition 1 that is established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment) in the advantageous section, or the net increase in medals in the advantageous section. When any one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding the number of sheets (2388 in this embodiment) is satisfied, the advantageous section can be terminated, and the sub-control unit 91 can perform the advantageous section game. When the number reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games, the second predetermined value (this example) before the net number of medals in the advantageous section reaches the specified number In any case, the common advantageous section end notice can be executed to notify that the end condition of the advantageous section is almost established, and the main control unit 41 As the ending condition 3 that can be satisfied before the ending condition 1 and the ending condition 2 are satisfied in the profit section, a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, the gaming state controlled in the game is not inside) Is established), the advantageous section can be ended, and the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value (1400 games in this embodiment) before reaching the upper limit number of games. Alternatively, when the net predetermined number of medals exceeds a second predetermined value (in this example, 2088) before exceeding the prescribed number, the end condition 3 is not satisfied until the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied. It is.

  According to this configuration, after the advantageous section end notice is executed because the number of advantageous section games has reached the first predetermined value or the medal net increase exceeds the second predetermined value, the end condition 1 is satisfied. Since the advantageous section continues until the end condition 2 is satisfied or the end condition 2 is satisfied, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

[Operation effect 4]
As a conventional slot machine, the game is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player until the number of remaining games becomes zero, and “HOLD” is displayed in the vicinity of the number of remaining games when a specific state is reached during the advantageous state. Some updates are stopped.

  There is room for improvement with respect to a configuration that can stop the update of the remaining amount of the advantageous state, such as the slot machine having such a configuration.

  On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment controls the AT state which is advantageous to the player, and the subtraction that reduces the remaining number of navigation games by winning the winning role in the internal lottery in the AT state It is possible to perform processing, and the AT state is terminated when the remaining number of navigation games reaches 0, and the number of navigation games even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery in the AT state The hold control can be performed to control the hold state so as not to decrease the hold state, and the hold state includes a first hold state and a second hold state.

  According to this configuration, the remaining number of navigation games is reduced by the fact that the winning combination is won in the internal lottery as a predetermined event, and the AT that ends when the remaining number of navigation games becomes 0 The state may be controlled to a hold state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease even if a predetermined event occurs in the AT state, and a plurality of types of hold including a first hold state and a second hold state Since it is controlled to the state, it is possible to enhance the interest associated with being controlled to the hold state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 subtracts a predetermined number from a predetermined counter (the number of navigation games) when a predetermined event occurs in the AT state (a navigation target role is won in an internal lottery). Then, when the value of the predetermined counter after subtraction becomes 0, the AT state is controlled to end. However, in the AT state, a predetermined event occurs (for example, navigation by internal lottery By adding the predetermined number to the predetermined counter so that the difference between the value of a predetermined counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of navigation notifications performed) and the specified value is reduced by winning the target combination) The configuration may be such that the AT state is terminated when the value of the predetermined counter reaches a predetermined value.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to control so that the subtraction process for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter is not performed in each game in the hold state, that is, the remaining number of navigation games in the hold state. Although the number is not updated, the main control unit 41 performs a subtraction process for subtracting the value of the navigation game number counter in the hold state, and the remaining number of navigation games corresponding to the period during which control is performed in the hold state. It is also possible to control so that the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease by increasing the number of navigation games.

  Further, in this embodiment, the AT state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, ends when the remaining number of navigation games, which is an advantageous amount indicating an amount of control that is advantageous for the player, becomes zero. The configuration to be performed, that is, the advantageous state is a configuration that is terminated when there is no remaining amount of the advantageous amount, but the advantageous state is that the predetermined termination condition is satisfied after the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is eliminated, It may be configured to be terminated. As a configuration in which a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the remaining amount of the advantageous amount is lost, as a predetermined end condition, for example, a specific symbol combination is stopped on a reel, or a predetermined number of games is performed. In other words, it may be applied that a specific role is won by an internal lottery.

  For example, as a predetermined end condition, for example, in a configuration in which a specific symbol combination is stopped on a reel, there are an advantageous first state that is an advantageous state and a second state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous gaming state. However, in the configuration in which the first state is terminated when the specific symbol combination is stopped on the reel and the state is shifted to the second state, in the first state, the specific symbol combination is stopped until there is no remaining advantageous amount. By adopting a configuration in which the specific operation mode for avoiding the notification is notified by the navigation notification, the specific operation mode is not performed when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount disappears when being controlled to the first state. It is possible to avoid stopping the specific symbol combination by performing the operation in the specific operation mode by oneself, and the first state is controlled until the specific symbol combination stops. And in the period controlled to the said 1st state, even after the remaining amount of an advantageous amount is lost, the navigation alert | report which suggests the operation aspect which can make a winning combination win a prize at the time of winning a pushing order small combination is performed. You may control as follows. In such a configuration, when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount disappears, the timing at which the advantageous control is terminated is shifted from the timing at which the first state, which is the advantageous state, is terminated. In such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 is a predetermined unit that is used when the first state is controlled until the first state is ended even after it is determined that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount has disappeared. By performing an effect on the liquid crystal display 51 using the background image, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the first state can be continued even after it has been determined that the remaining amount of the advantageous amount has disappeared. Can do.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control unit 41 that controls an advantageous section that can be controlled to the AT state, and the main control unit 41 includes the number of advantageous section games and the net number of medals in the advantageous section in the advantageous section. Can be counted, and the end condition 1 established when the number of advantageous section games reaches the upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment), or the net number of medals is a specified number (2388 in this embodiment). When either one of the end conditions 2 established by exceeding is established, the advantageous section is controlled to end, and the first predetermined value before the advantageous section game number reaches the upper limit number of games. When either (1400 games) is reached, the end condition is satisfied in any case when the net number of medals reaches the second predetermined value (2089) before reaching the specified number. A common prior notice (advanced section end notice) that informs that it is near can be executed, and the prior notice is information related to the end condition 1 (the number of remaining games up to the upper limit value of the number of advantageous section games) and information related to the end condition 2. (Remaining number of sheets up to a specified number of net increase sheets).

  According to this configuration, the end condition 1 established when the number of advantageous section games updated in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, or the completion established when the net increase in medals updated in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number. Even when one of the conditions 2 is not satisfied, the advantageous section ends when the other is satisfied, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from being excessively advantageous by being controlled to the advantageous section. In addition, when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value before reaching the upper limit number of games or when the net predetermined number of medals reaches the second predetermined value before exceeding the prescribed number, the end condition Since the common prior notification for notifying that the establishment is near is executed, it is possible to prevent the termination of the advantageous section due to the termination condition 1 or the termination condition 2 being established. At this time, since the common prior notification includes both information regarding the end condition 1 and information regarding the end condition 2, either the end condition 1 or the end condition 2 is satisfied even in the common prior notification. Thus, it can be recognized in advance that the advantageous section ends.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 establishes the advantageous section end condition 1 when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (advantageous section game number) reaches the upper limit number of games (first specified value). It is determined that the advantageous section is ended, and it is determined that the advantageous section ending condition 1 is satisfied when the number of advantageous section games is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (first specified value). The advantageous section may be configured to end, or the advantageous section end condition 1 is reached when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value (first prescribed value −1) immediately before reaching the upper limit number of games (first prescribed value). It may be determined that is established and the advantageous section is terminated. In addition, the main control unit 41 determines that the advantageous section end condition 2 is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number (second prescribed value), and terminates the advantageous section. However, if the net increase in the advantageous zone reaches the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number (second specified value + 1) or more than the number of sheets that is one more than the specified number, the favorable condition end condition 2 is satisfied. The configuration may be such that it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, and the advantageous section ends.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the advantageous section end notice when the number of advantageous section games reaches the first predetermined value (1400 games in the present embodiment). The advantage section end notice is executed when the number of games exceeds the first predetermined value, but it is advantageous when the number of advantageous section games exceeds the value immediately before reaching the first predetermined value (1399 games). It may be configured to execute a section end notice. Further, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to execute the advance notice of the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second predetermined value (2088 in this embodiment). The configuration may be such that an advantageous section end notice is executed when the number of sheets reaches a second predetermined value or more, or an advantageous section end notice is executed when the net increase in the advantageous section reaches the second predetermined value + 1. .

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform hold control for controlling to a hold state that does not decrease the number of navigation games even if a winning role is won by internal lottery in the AT state, Is a configuration including a first hold state and a second hold state. The first hold state is a state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games does not increase. The second hold state is a configuration in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games may be added and increased.

  According to this configuration, in the second hold state, not only the remaining number of the navigation game quantity does not decrease but also can increase, so that the interest by having the first hold state and the second hold state can be further enhanced. .

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to perform hold control for controlling to a hold state that does not decrease the number of navigation games even if a winning role is won by internal lottery in the AT state, Is a configuration including a first hold state and a second hold state. The first hold state is a state in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games does not increase. The second hold state is a configuration in which the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease and the remaining number of navigation games may be added and increased, and the second hold state is an internal lottery. The remaining number of navigation games can be increased when the navigation target combination is won.

  According to this configuration, in the second hold state, if the predetermined number of events (winning of the navigation target role) that causes the remaining number of navigation games to decrease unless controlled to the hold state, Since the remaining number can be increased, it is possible to further enhance interest by being controlled to the second hold state.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can display a remaining navigation game number suggestion image that displays the remaining number of navigation games in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation game number can be reduced by the subtraction process of the navigation game number. When the remaining number of the number decreases, the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is also updated so that the remaining number of the displayed navigation games decreases, and the hold indicating that it is controlled to the hold state It is possible to perform an effect, and the hold effect is a first hold effect that indicates that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state, and a first effect that indicates that the hold effect is controlled in the second hold state. The second hold effect is controlled to be in the hold state even when it is suggested that the first hold effect has been controlled in the hold state. Even when suggesting that it has been a configuration that reduces the number of remaining visibility number navigation game displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion images.

  According to this configuration, in the hold state, it is intuitive that the remaining number of navigation games does not decrease by reducing the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. It can be recognized, and even if it suggests that it has been controlled to the hold state in the first hold state, or suggests that it has been controlled to the hold state in the second hold state, Since the visibility of the remaining number of displayed navigation games is lowered, it is possible to easily notify that the remaining number of navigation games is not decreased in any of the hold states.

  In this embodiment, in the first hold effect and the second hold effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a strong hold image or a weak hold image on the remaining navigation game number suggestion image, and displays the remaining navigation game number suggestion image. The remaining number of displayed navigation games is covered with a strong hold image or a weak hold image so as to be invisible, thereby reducing the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games. In a two-hold effect, even if the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is thinned or the transparency is lowered, the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games is reduced. In the first hold effect and the second hold effect, the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is displayed. By removed by, it may be configured to reduce the number of remaining visibility number navigation game.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can display a remaining navigation game number suggestion image that displays the remaining number of navigation games in the AT state on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation game number can be subtracted from the navigation game. When the remaining number of the number is decreased, the remaining navigation game number suggestion image is also updated so that the remaining number of the displayed navigation games is decreased, and the hold indicating the controlled state is held. It is possible to perform an effect, and the hold effect is a first hold effect that suggests that the hold state is controlled in the first hold state, and a first effect that indicates that the hold effect is controlled in the second hold state. The first hold effect is displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image over the period controlled to the first hold state. Visibility of the remaining number of video games is reduced, and the second hold effect reduces the visibility of the remaining number of navigation games displayed by the remaining navigation game number suggestion image over the period controlled to the second hold state. It is a configuration.

  According to this configuration, in any of the hold states, the remaining number of navigation games is reduced in visibility due to the corresponding hold effect over the period. It can be notified that the number does not decrease.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. The configuration includes a first hold state and a second hold state, and the control content related to the AT controlled by the main control unit 41 is common both after the end of the first hold state and after the end of the second hold state. This is a configuration for shifting to a non-hold state (normal AT state).

  According to this configuration, even if controlled to the first hold state and controlled to the second hold state, the state shifts to the common non-hold state after the end, so that the hold state has ended. Can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state that does not decrease the number of navigation games even if a winning role is won by internal lottery in the AT state. The first hold state and the second hold state are included, and the effect mode controlled by the sub-control unit 91 is common after the end of the first hold state and after the end of the second hold state. It is the structure which transfers to AT production (normal).

  According to this configuration, even if controlled to the first hold state or controlled to the second hold state, since the transition to the common AT effect (normal) is performed after the end, the hold state ends. You can make it easy to recognize what you did.

  In this embodiment, after the end of the first hold state and after the end of the second hold state, a non-hold state (normal AT state) in which the control content related to AT controlled by the main control unit 41 is common, and It is the structure which transfers to AT production (normal) which the production mode controlled by the sub-control part 91 is common, and is advantageous for a player after the end of the first hold state and after the end of the second hold state. The content is in a common state and the production mode is changed to a common state, but the advantageous control content for the player is common after the first hold state and after the second hold state. Or the structure which transfers to at least one of a common state may be sufficient.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. The liquid crystal display 51 includes a first hold state and a second hold state. The AT is common to the liquid crystal display 51 both after the first hold state and after the second hold state. This is a configuration in which an effect (normal) background image A is displayed.

  According to this configuration, since the common AT effect (normal) background image A is displayed both in the first hold state and in the second hold state, the hold state is It is possible to make it easier to recognize the end.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous section that can be controlled to the AT state, and an advantageous section game number counter that counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games); A net increment counter for counting the number of medals increased in the advantageous section, and even when the remaining number of navigation games is 1 or more, the advantageous section game number counted by the advantageous section game number counter is the upper limit number of games. The AT state is also terminated when either one of the end condition 1 that is satisfied by reaching or the end condition 2 that is satisfied when the net increase in medals counted by the net increase counter exceeds the specified number is satisfied. The advantageous section game number counter counts the advantageous section games even in the hold state, and the net increase number counter is in the hold state. It can have a configuration for counting the increased medals net increase number in an advantageous interval.

  According to this configuration, the AT state ends when the upper limit number of games is reached from the beginning of the advantageous section, and the net increase in medals that has increased in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number even when the upper limit number of games is not reached In addition, since the AT state ends, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the advantage, and even when controlled to the hold state, the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval and the net increase in medals increased in the advantageous interval. Since the number of sheets is counted, it is possible to prevent the advantage from being excessively increased even if controlled to the hold state.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. It is configured to include a 1-hold state and a second hold state, and can be controlled to an added state in which an additional number of navigation games can be given as an advantageous benefit for the player in the first hold state and the second hold state It is the structure which can perform the privilege provision suggestion production which suggests sex.

  According to this structure, it can be made to expect that a privilege will be provided by controlling to a 1st hold state and a 2nd hold state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to be able to perform a privilege giving suggestion effect in the first hold state and the second hold state, but at least in the first hold state and the second hold state. The structure which can perform privilege provision suggestion production in one state may be sufficient.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state. Including the 1 hold state and the 2nd hold state, and in the AT state (non-hold state), when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the specified small role 1 or the specified small role 2, it is controlled to the second hold state In the first hold state, the number of navigation games is not added as a privilege, and the number of navigation games is added as a privilege in the second hold state. In the hold control, it was decided that the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the specified small combination 1 or the specific small combination 2 and the control is performed in the second hold state. On the other hand, while the control is performed in the second hold state, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the specified small combination 1 or the specific small combination 2 and it is not determined to control to the second hold state, the first hold state is set. It is the structure to control. In addition, it is possible to perform a bonus giving suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to an additional state in which an additional number of navigation games can be given as an advantageous privilege for the player in the first hold state and the second hold state. The privilege grant suggestion is a configuration that suggests the possibility that a privilege is granted even in the first hold state.

  According to this configuration, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes the specific small role 1 or the specific small role 2 and the possibility of being controlled to the second hold state where the privilege can be granted is suggested, the first hold state is entered. Even in the case of being controlled, there is a possibility that the privilege is given by the privilege giving suggestion during that time, so it is possible to increase the expectation that the privilege will be given even in such a case.

  Further, for example, the main control unit 41 can perform hold control for controlling to a hold state in which the number of navigation games is not reduced even if a winning combination is won in the internal lottery in the AT state, and the first hold state In the configuration that can be controlled to the hold state including the second hold state, the first hold state is set as a precursor state that indicates the possibility of being controlled to the second hold state, and the second hold state is added to the number of navigation games. As a possible additional state, a state lottery for determining whether or not to control to the second hold state is performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, winning of a specific role), and the first hold state is set regardless of the lottery result of the lottery. In the case of controlling and winning the state lottery, the first hold state may be followed by the second hold state. In such a configuration, by controlling to the first hold state, it can be expected to be controlled to the second hold state (additional state).

  Moreover, in the structure which can be controlled to the 2nd hold state following the 1st hold state, in the 1st hold state, the privilege grant suggestion effect which suggests the possibility of being controlled to the addition state as a privilege advantageous for the player is performed. It is preferable to have a configuration to be obtained, and when such a configuration is used, when the first hold state is controlled, there is a possibility that a privilege is granted by a privilege grant suggestion during that time, The expectation to be granted can be raised.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which bets are set using medals and credits as game values has been described. However, slots for setting bets using game balls as game values. The present invention may be applied to a machine or a fully credit type slot machine that uses only credit as a gaming value to set a bet amount. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the bet number in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, for example, a combination of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. It may be. That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls when a winning occurs. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out all of utility values.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, an example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine has been shown. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 12 Game auxiliary indicator 12a Advantageous section notification LED
41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each capable of being identified,
In the slot machine capable of deriving the display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and winning can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous state control means for controlling advantageous state advantageous to the player;
A remaining amount reducing means capable of reducing the remaining amount of the advantageous amount by occurrence of a predetermined event in the advantageous state;
First advantageous state ending means for ending the advantageous state when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount runs out;
Hold state control means for controlling to a hold state that does not decrease the remaining amount of the advantageous amount even if a predetermined event occurs in the advantageous state;
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section that can be controlled to the advantageous state;
Game number counting means for counting the number of games controlled in the advantageous section;
Increased value counting means for counting the increased value in the advantageous section;
The first condition established when the number of games counted by the game number counting means reaches the specified number of games or the value counted by the increased value counting means even when the remaining amount of the advantageous amount remains A second advantageous state ending means for ending the advantageous state when either one of the second conditions established by exceeding a specified value is satisfied;
With
The hold state includes a first hold state and a second hold state,
The game number counting means counts the number of games controlled in the advantageous section even in the hold state,
The increased value counting means is a slot machine that counts an increased value in the advantageous section even in the hold state.

Images